Om 830e Serie A30733 Up Cead015001 PDF

Operation & Maintenance
Manual
CEAM015001
DUMP TRUCK
SERIAL NUMBERS
A30733 & UP
NOTES:
Unsafe use of this machine may cause serious injury or death. Operators and maintenance
personnel must read and understand this manual before operating or maintaining this machine.
This manual should be kept in or near the machine for reference, and periodically reviewed by
all personnel who will come into contact with it.
This material is proprietary to Komatsu America Corp (KAC), and is not to be reproduced, used, or
disclosed except in accordance with written authorization from KAC.
It is the policy of the Company to improve products whenever it is possible and practical to do so. The
Company reserves the right to make changes or add improvements at any time without incurring any
obligation to install such changes on products sold previously.
Because of continuous research and development, periodic revisions may be made to this publication.
Customers should contact their local Komatsu distributor for information on the latest revision.
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle

components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
NOTES
EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY

EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT (APPLIES TO CANADA ONLY)
1.
Products Warranted
Komatsu America International Company, Komatsu Mining Systems Inc. and Komatsu Utility Corporation (collectively Komatsu) produce and/or
market products under brand names of Komatsu, Dresser, Dressta, Haulpak and Galion. This emissions warranty applies to new engines bearing the
Komatsu name installed in these products and used in Canada in machines designed for industrial off-highway use. This warranty applies only to
these engines produced on or after January 1, 2000. This warranty will be administered by Komatsu distribution in Canada.
2.
Coverage
Komatsu warrants to the ultimate purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that the engine is designed, built and equipped so as to conform, at the
time of sale by Komatsu, with all U.S. Federal emission regulations applicable at the time of manufacture and that it is free from defects in
workmanship or material which would cause it not to meet these regulations within five years or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first, as
measured from the date of delivery of the engine to the ultimate purchaser.
3.
Limitations
Failures, other than those resulting from defects in materials or workmanship, are not covered by this warranty. Komatsu is not responsible for
failures or damage resulting from what Komatsu determines to be abuse or neglect, including, but not limited to: operation without adequate coolant
or lubricants; over fueling; over speeding; lack of maintenance of lubricating, cooling or intake systems; improper storage, starting, warm-up, run-in
or shutdown practices; unauthorized modifications of the engine. Komatsu is also not responsible for failures caused by incorrect fuel or by water,
dirt or other contaminants in the fuel. Komatsu is not responsible for non-engine repairs, downtime expense, related damage, fines, all business
costs or other losses resulting from a warrantable failure.
KOMATSU IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

This warranty, together with the express commercial warranties, are the sole warranties of Komatsu. THERE ARE NO OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OR OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICUALR PURPOSE.
GARANTIE SUR LE CONTRLE DES MISSIONS

NONC DE GARANTIE SUR LE CONTRLE DES MISSIONS (APPLICABLE AU CANADA SEULEMENT):
1.
Produits garantis:
Komatsu America International Company, Komatsu Mining Systems Inc. et Komatsu Utility Corporation (collectivement Komatsu) produisent et/ou font la
mise en march de produits portant les noms de marque Komatsu, Dresser, Dressta, Haulpak et Galion. Cette garantie sur les missions sapplique tous les
nouveaux moteurs portant le nom Komatsu, installs dans ces produits et utiliss au Canada dans des machines conues pour utilisation industrielle nonroutire. Cette garantie sapplique seulement sur les moteurs produits partir du 1er Janvier 2000. Cette garantie sera administre par la distribution de
Komatsu au Canada .
2.
Couverture:
Komatsu garantit lacheteur ultime et chaque acheteur subsquent que le moteur est conu, construit et quip en toute conformit, au moment de la vente
par Komatsu, avec toutes les Rglementations fdrales amricaines sur les missions applicables au moment de la fabrication et quil est exempt de dfauts
de construction ou de matriaux qui auraient pour effet de contrevenir ces rglementations en dedans de 5 ans ou 3000 heures dopration, mesur partir
de la date de livraison du moteur au client ultime.
3.
Limitations:
Les bris, autres que ceux rsultant de dfauts de matriaux ou de construction, ne sont pas couverts par cette Garantie. Komatsu nest pas responsable pour
bris ou dommages rsultant de ce que Komatsu dtermine comme tant de labus ou ngligence, incluant mais ne se limitant pas : lopration sans
lubrifiants ou agent refroidissants adquats; la suralimentation dessence; la survitesse; le manque dentretien des systmes de lubrification, de
refroidissement ou dentre; de pratiques non-propices dentreposage, de mise en marche, de rchauffement, de conditionnement ou darrt; les
modifications non-autorises du moteur. De plus, Komatsu nest pas responsable de bris causs par de lessence inadquate ou de leau, des salets ou autres
contaminants dans lessence. Komatsu nest pas responsable des rparations non-relies au moteur, des dpenses encourues suite aux temps darrts, des
dommages relatifs, amendes, et de tout autre cot daffaires ou autres pertes rsultant dun bris couvert par la garantie.
KOMATSU NEST PAS RESPONSABLE DES INCIDENTS OU DOMMAGES CONSQUENTS.

Cette garantie, ainsi que les garanties expresses commerciales, sont les seules garanties de Komatsu. IL NY A AUCUNE AUTRE
GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU SOUS -ENTENDUE, MARCHANDABLE OU PROPICE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIRE.
CEHQ000700 - Komatsu America International Company 12/99
AVERTISSEMENT
DES BLESSURES PEUVENT RSULTER ET LA GARANTIE
SANNULER SI LES RPM DU TAUX DESSENCE OU LALTITUDE
EXCDENT LES VALEURS MAXIMALES PUBLIES POUR CE
MODLE ET SON APPLICATION.
INFORMATION IMPORTANTE SUR LE MOTEUR

CE MOTEUR EST CONFORME AUX NORMES AMRICAINES DELEPA (ANNE DU
MODLE) ET DE LA CALIFORNIE POUR LES MOTEURS LARGES NON-ROUTIERS A IGNITION PAR COMPRESSION. CE MOTEUR EST CERTIFI POUR OPERATION ESSENCE
DISEL.
MODLE DU MOTEUR
IMPORTANT ENGINE INFORMATION

THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO YYYY MODEL YEAR U.S. EPA REGULATION AND THE CALIFORNIA
REGULATIONS LARGE NON ROAD COMPRESSION IGNITION ENGINES. THIS ENGINE IS CERTIFIED TO OPERATE ON DIESEL FUEL.
WARNING
INJURY MAY RESULT AND WARRANTY IS VOIDED IF FUEL RATE RPM OR ALTITUDES EXCEED
PUBLISHED MAXIMUM VALUES FOR THIS MODEL AND APPLICATION.
FAMILLE DU MOTEUR
ENGINE MODEL
SERIAL NO.
SYSTME DE
CONTROLE DES
MISSIONS DCHAPPEMENT
ENGINE FAMILY
DISPLACEMENT
EXHAUST EMISSION
CONTROL SYSTEM
FIRING ORDER
CHARGE DE SORTIE ADV.

PORTE DE VALVE FROID
(mm)
VITESSE STATIQUE
ADV. LOAD OUTPUT

VALVE LASH
COLD (mm)
IN.
HP)
EX. FUEL RATE

AT ADV.
DPLACEMENT
LITERS
1-5-3-6-2-4
RPM
LITRES
SQUENCE DE MISE FEU
mm3/STROKE
mm3/BATTEMENT
TAUX DESSENCE ADV.
IDLE SPEED
INITIAL INJECTION
TIMING
RGLAGE DE LALLUMAGE INJECTION INITIALE
Kw (
NO. SRIE
RPM FAMILY EMISSION LIMIT

DEG. BTDC DATE OF MANUFACTURE
_____________________________________________
KOMATSU LTD.
MADE IN JAPAN
DEG. BTDC
KOMATSU LTE
FABRIQU AU JAPON
ENGINE DATAPLATE - ENGLISH / FRENCH
LIMITE DMISSION DE
LA FAMILLE
DATE
DE FABRICATION
OM1046 10/04
Introduction - Section 10
Page 10-1
FOREWORD
This Manual is written for use by the operator and/or the service technician and is designed to help these persons
to become fully knowledgeable of the truck and all its systems in order to keep it operating safely and efficiently.
All operators and maintenance personnel should read and understand the materials in this manual before operating the truck or performing maintenance and/or operational checks on the truck. All safety notices, warnings and
cautions should be understood and followed when operating or accomplishing repairs on the truck.
The first section is an Introduction to the manual and contains a Table of Contents to locate specific areas of interest. Other sections include Safety, Operation, Maintenance, Specifications, and Optional Equipment.
The illustrations used in this manual are TYPICAL of the component shown and may not be an exact reproduction
of what is found on the truck.
A product identification plate is located on the frame in front of the right side front wheel and designates the Truck
Model Number, Product Identification Number (vehicle serial number), and Maximum G.V.W. (Gross Vehicle
Weight) rating.
The KOMATSU Truck Model designation consists of three numbers and one letter (i.e. 830E). The three numbers
represent the basic truck model. The letter M designates a Mechanical drive and the letter E designates an
Electrical wheelmotor drive system.
The Product Identification Number (vehicle serial number) contains information which will identify the original manufacturing bill of material for this unit. This complete number will be necessary for proper ordering of many service
parts and/or warranty consideration.
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is what determines the load on the drive train, frame, tires, and other components. The vehicle design and application guidelines are sensitive to the total maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) and this means the TOTAL WEIGHT: the Empty Vehicle Weight + the fuel & lubricants + the payload.
To determine allowable payload:
Service all lubricants for proper level and fill fuel tank of empty truck (which includes all accessories, body liners,
tailgates, etc.) and then weigh truck. Record this value and subtract from the GVW rating. The result is the allowable payload.
NOTE: Accumulations of mud, frozen material, etc. become a part of the GVW and reduces allowable payload. To
maximize payload and to keep from exceeding the GVW rating, these accumulations should be removed as often
as practical.
Exceeding the allowable payload will reduce expected life of truck components.
! WARNING !
Unsafe use of this machine may cause serious injury or death. Operators and maintenance personnel must read this manual before operating or maintaining this machine. This manual should be kept in or near
the machine for reference and periodically reviewed by all personnel
who come in contact with it.
Page 10-2
10/04 OM1046
This ALERT symbol is used with the signal words,

DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION in this manual to alert the reader to hazards arising from improper
operating and maintenance practices.
DANGER identifies a specific potential hazard WHICH WILL

RESULT IN EITHER INJURY OR DEATH if proper precautions
are not taken.
WARNING identifies a specific potential hazard WHICH MAY

RESULT IN EITHER INJURY OR DEATH if proper precautions
are not taken.
CAUTION is used for general reminders of proper safety

practices OR to direct the readers attention to avoid unsafe
or improper practices which may result in damage to the
equipment.
OM1046 10/04
Page 10-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SECTION / PAGE
FOREWARD
10-1
Alerts Page - a description of DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Truck Model Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
ABOUT THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
STANDARD CHARTS AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
SAFETY
20-1
Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clothing And Personal Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unauthorized Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leaving The Operators Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting And Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fire Prevention For Fuel And Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions With High Temperature Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Asbestos Dust Hazard Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prevention Of Injury By Work Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fire Extinguisher And First Aid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions When Using ROPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions For Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions For Starting Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20-1
20-1
20-1
20-1
20-2
20-2
20-2
20-3
20-3
20-3
20-3
20-4
20-4
20-4
20-5
Safety Is Thinking Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety At The Worksite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fire Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing For Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilation In Enclosed Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Operators Cab - Before Starting The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors, Windows, And Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20-5
20-5
20-5
20-5
20-5
20-6
20-6
20-6
When Starting The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Truck Operation - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check When Traveling In Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traveling On Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ensure Good Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20-6
20-6
20-7
20-7
20-8
20-8
Page 10-4
10/04 OM1046
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Operate Carefully On Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-8
Avoid Damage To Dump Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-8
Driving Near High Voltage Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-8
When Dumping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-9
Working On Loose Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-9
When Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-9
Parking The Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-9
TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-9
WORKING NEAR BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-10
Battery Hazard Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-10
Starting With Booster Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-10
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
Warning Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
Proper Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
Stopping The Engine Before Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
Securing The Dump Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
DURING MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12
Working Under The Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12
Keep The Machine Clean
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12
Rules To Follow When Adding Fuel Or Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12
Radiator Water Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-13
Use Of Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-13
Precautions With The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-13
Handling High Pressure Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-13
Precautions With High Pressure Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-13
Precautions When Performing Maintenance Near High Temperature Or High Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-14
Rotating Fan And Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-14
Waste Materials
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-14
TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-15
Handling Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-15
Storing Tires After Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-15
ADDITIONAL JOB SITE RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-16
WHEN REPAIRS ARE NECESSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-17
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
22-1
OM1046 10/04
Page 10-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
30-1
PREPARING FOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1

Safety Is Thinking Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1
At The Truck - Ground Level Walk Around Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1
ENGINE START-UP SAFETY PRACTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-4
AFTER ENGINE HAS STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-5
MACHINE OPERATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-5
LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6
HAULING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6
PASSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6
DUMPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
To Raise Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Lower Body: When dumping over a berm or into a crusher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Lower Body: When dumping on flat ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30-7
30-7
30-7
30-8
SUDDEN LOSS OF ENGINE POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-9

SAFE PARKING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-9
ENGINE SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-9
DELAYED ENGINE SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10
RESERVE ENGINE OIL SYSTEM (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
LED Monitor Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
Changing Oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
OPERATOR CAB AND CONTROLS
32-1
STEERING WHEEL AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2

Horn Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt / Telescope Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-function Turn Signal Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam Headlight Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshieldindshield Wiper Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PEDALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32-2
32-2
32-2
32-2
32-2
32-2
32-3
Service Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dynamic Retarder Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Throttle Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HEATER / AIR CONDITIONER COMPARTMENT AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32-3
32-3
32-3
32-4
Defroster Vent Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heat Vent Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater/air Conditioner Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater/air Conditioner Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32-4
32-4
32-4
32-4
32-4
32-4
Page 10-6
10/04 OM1046
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OVERHEAD PANEL AND DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
Grade/speed Warning Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
Radio Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
Warning Alarm Buzzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
Cab Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
Warning Lights Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
Status / Warning Indicator Light Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
Windshield Wipers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-5
Air Cleaner Vacuum Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-6
CENTER CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-6
F-n-r Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-6
Hoist Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
To Raise Body: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
To Lower Body: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
Ash Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
L.h. Window Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
R.h. Window Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
Engine Shutdown Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-7
Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-8
Retard Speed Control (RSC) Off/on Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-8
Retard Speed Control (RSC) Adjust Dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-8
Statex III Propulsion System Diagnostic Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-9
Komatsu Engine Quantum Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-9
Komatsu Engine Cense Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-9
Unused Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-9
Modular Mining Port Conector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-9
Data Store Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-9
Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-9
Service Engine Light (Blue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-9
Payload Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-9
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-10
CONTROL SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-10
INSTRUMENT PANEL GAUGES, INDICATORS, & CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-11
Key Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-12
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-12
Engine Shutdown Switch With Timer Delay (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-12
Fog Lights (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-13
Ladder Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-13
Manual Backup Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-13
Panel Illumination Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-13
Cab Air Conditioner / Heater Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-13
Engine Cold Weather Starting Aid (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-13
Rotating Beacon Light Switch (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32-13
OM1046 10/04
Page 10-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Heated Mirror Switch (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Brake Lock Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Turn Signal Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left Turn Signal Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer / Payload Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Water Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hourmeter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel Light Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Payload Meter Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INDICATOR LIGHT SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32-13
32-14
32-14
32-14
32-15
32-15
32-15
32-15
32-15
32-15
32-15
32-15
32-16
32-16
32-16
32-16
32-18
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-22

Lamp Test Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-22
OPERATOR COMFORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-23
OPERATOR SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-23
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-23
Seat Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-23
Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-24
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE
40-1
830E SERVICE CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1

HYDRAULIC TANK SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1
Adding Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1
COOLANT LEVEL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2
RADIATOR FILLING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2
RESERVE ENGINE OIL SYSTEM (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2
Reserve Oil Tank Filling Procedure (Remote fill) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2
LUBRICATION CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-3
10 HOUR (DAILY) INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-4
50 HOUR LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-6
100 HOUR LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-7
250 HOUR LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-8
500 HOUR LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10
1000 HOURS LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-11
2500 HOUR MAINTENANCE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-12
5000 HOUR MAINTENANCE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-12
10,000 HOUR MAINTENANCE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-12
Page 10-8
10/04 OM1046
TABLE OF CONTENTS
AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM
42-1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-1

SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-3
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-4
Normal Operation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-4
Pressure Failure Detection Circuits: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-5
INJECTOR OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-6
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-7
Lubricant Required For System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-7
System Priming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-7
Filter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-7
LUBRICANT PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-8
Pump Housing Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-8
Pump Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-8
Pressure Control Valve Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-8
INJECTORS (SL-1 Series H)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-9
Injector Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-9
Injector Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-9
SYSTEM CHECKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-10
Lubrication Cycle Timer Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-10
Lubrication Cycle Timer Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-10
SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-11
PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-13
Daily Lubrication System Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-13
250 Hour Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-13
1000 Hour Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-13
MAJOR COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
50-1
PAYLOAD METER III
60-1
OM1046 10/04
Page 10-9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT
SECTION / PAGE
RADIO, AM / FM STEREO CASSETTE
70-1
SETTING THE TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-1

GENERAL RECEIVER FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-1
Turning The Power On And Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting The Default Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATING THE RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-1
70-1
70-2
70-2
70-2
BAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TUNE/SEEK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEEK Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE RECEIVER SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70-2
70-2
70-2
70-2
70-2
70-2
70-3
PROGRAMMING PRESET STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-3

OPERATION OF THE WEATHERBAND (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-3
SATELLITE RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-4
Operating Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-4
Program Type Search (PTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-4
CASSETTE PLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-5
Playing A Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-5
Cassette Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-5
PROGRAMMABLE EJECT DEFAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-5
Bad Tape Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-5
CASSETTE PLAYER CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-5
Page 10-10
10/04 OM1046
KOMATSU 830E TRUCK
OM1046 10/04
Page 10-11
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This Manual is written for use by the operator and/or the service technician and is designed to help these persons
to become fully knowledgeable of the truck and all its systems in order to keep it operating safely and efficiently. All
operators and maintenance personnel should read and understand the materials in this manual before operating
the truck or performing maintenance and/or operational checks on the truck. All safety notices, warnings, and cautions should be understood and followed when operating or accomplishing repairs on the truck.
The front cover of this manual includes a Form Number. This Form No. should be referenced when ordering additional copies of this manual, or for any other correspondence regarding the coverage in this manual.
Direct all inquiries to:
Komatsu America Corp.
DataKom, Peoria Technical Publications
P.O. Box 240
Peoria, IL 61650-0240
FAX - (309)-672-7072
This first section is an Introduction to the manual and contains a Table of Contents to locate specific areas of interest. Other sections include Safety, Operation, Maintenance, Specifications, and Optional Equipment.
When searching for a specific area of interest, go first to the Table of Contents to locate the Section in which the
subject might generally be included. Then, go to that Section of the Table of Contents to find a Subject description
that most closely describes the specific area of interest to find a page number and go to that page. Section Numbers and Page Numbers are located at the top, outside corner of the page.
At the top, inside corner of the page is a document (module) number. If there is ever a question regarding the information in a particular Section, refer to the document (module) number, the manual Form No., and use the address
shown above to correspond. If there is a date (month/year) behind the document (module) number, that indicates
the latest revision date of that page.
The illustrations used in this manual are TYPICAL of the component shown and may not be an exact reproduction
of what is found on the truck.
This manual shows dimensioning of U.S. standard and metric (SI) units throughout. All references to Right, Left,
Front, or Rear are made with respect to the operators normal seated position, unless specifically stated otherwise.
When assembly instructions are provided without references to torque values, standard torque values should be
assumed. Standard torque requirements are shown in torque charts on the following pages of this section, and in
the General Information section of the truck service manual. Individual torques when provided in the text are in bold
face type, such as 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m) torque. All torque specifications have 10% tolerance unless otherwise
specified.
Page 10-12
10/04 OM1046
NOTES:
OM1200
Standard Charts and Tables - Section 12

Page 12-1
STANDARD CHARTS AND TABLES

This manual provides dual dimensioning for most specifications. U.S. standard units are specified first, with
metric (SI) units in parentheses. References throughout the manual to standard torques or other standard
values will be to one of the following Charts or Tables.
For values not shown in any of the charts or tables,
standard conversion factors for most commonly used
measurements are provided in TABLE XIII, page 12-6.
INDEX OF TABLES
TABLE I . . . . . . . Standard Torque Chart (SAE)
TABLE II . Standard Torque, 12-Point, Grade 9
TABLE III . . Standard Metric Assembly Torque
TABLE IV . . . . . . JIC Swivel Nuts Torque Chart
TABLE V . . . . . . . . .Pipe Thread Torque Chart
TABLE VI . . . . . . . . O-Ring Boss Torque Chart
TABLEVII . . . . O-Ring Face Seal Torque Chart
TABLE VIII . Torque Conversions (ft.lbs. - N.m)
TABLE IX . . Torque Conversions (ft.lbs. - kg.m)
TABLE X . . . Pressure Conversions (psi - kPa)
TABLE XI . . Pressure Conversions (psi - MPa)
TABLE XII . . . . . . . .Temperature Conversions
TABLE XIII . . . Common Conversion Multipliers
. . 12-9
. 12-10
. 12-10
. 12-11
. 12-11
. 12-11
. 12-11
. 12-12
. 12-12
. 12-12
. 12-12
. 12-13
. 12-14
EFFECT OF SPECIAL LUBRICANTS

On Fasteners and Standard Torque Values
KOMATSU engineering department does NOT recommend the use of special friction-reducing lubricants
such as, Copper Coat, Never Seize, and other similar products on the threads of standard fasteners
where standard torque values are applied.
The use of special friction-reducing lubricants will significantly alter the clamping force being applied to fasteners during the tightening process.
If special friction-reducing lubricants are used with the
Standard Torque values listed below in Table I (and
in Komatsu shop manuals), excessive stress and possible breakage of the fasteners may result.
Where Torque Tables specify Lubricated Threads for
the Standard Torque values listed, these standard
torque values are to be used with simple lithium
base chassis grease (multi-purpose EP NLGI) or a
rust- preventive grease (see list, page 12-10) on the
threads and seats, unless specified otherwise.
NOTE: Always be sure threads of fasteners and tapped
holes are free of burrs and other imperfections before
assembling.
Standard torque values are not to be used when
Turn-of-the-Nut tightening procedures are recommended.
Grade 5
Table 1: -STANDARD TORQUE CHART

SAE HEX HEAD CAPSCREW AND NUT ASSEMBLY
(LUBRICATED THREADS)
TOLERANCES 10%
TORQUE GRADE 5
TORQUE GRADE 8
Capscrew
Thread
Size
ft. lbs.
kg.m
N.m
ft. lbs.
kg.m
N.m
1/4-20
0.97
9.5
10
1.38
13.6
Capscrew
Thread
Size
Grade 8
TORQUE GRADE 5
TORQUE GRADE 8
ft. lbs.
kg.m
N.m
ft. lbs.
kg.m
N.m
235
32.5
319
335
46.3
454
350
48.4
475
500
69.2
678
7/8-14
375
51.9
508
530
73.3
719
3/4-16
7/8-9
1/4-28
1.11
10.8
11
1.52
14.9
5/16-18
15
2.07
20.3
21
2.90
28
5/16-24
16
2.21
22
22
3.04
30
1.0-8
525
72.6
712
750
103.7
1017
3/8-16
25
3.46
34
35
4.84
47
1.0-12
560
77.4
759
790
109.3
1071
3/8-24
30
4.15
41
40
5.5
54
1.0-14
570
78.8
773
800
110.6
1085
7/16-14
40
5.5
54
58
8.0
79
1 1/8-7
650
89.9
881
1050
145
1424
7/16-20
45
6.2
61
62
8.57
84
1 1/8-12
700
96.8
949
1140
158
1546
1/2-13
65
88
90
12.4
122
1 1/4-7
910
125.9
1234
1480
205
2007
1/2-20
70
9.7
95
95
13.1
129
1 1/4-12
975
134.8
1322
1580
219
2142
9/16-12
90
12.4
122
125
17.3
169
1 3/8-6
1200
166
1627
1940
268
2630
9/16-18
95
13.1
129
135
18.7
183
1 3/8-12
1310
181
1776
2120
293
2874
5/8-11
125
17.3
169
175
24.2
237
1 1/2-6
1580
219
2142
2560
354
3471
5/8-18
135
18.7
183
190
26.2
258
1 1/2-12
1700
235
2305
2770
383
3756
3/4-10
220
30.4
298
310
42.8
420
1 ft. lbs. = 0.138 kg.m = 1.356 N.m

Page 12-2
OM1200
Standard Assembly Torques For 12-Point, Grade 9,

Capscrews (SAE)
Standard Metric Assembly Torque For Class 10.9

Capscrews & Class 10 Nuts
The following specifications apply to required assembly

torques for all 12-Point, Grade 9 (170,000 psi minimum
tensile), Capscrews.
The following specifications apply to required assembly

torques for all metric Class 10.9 finished hexagon head
capscrews and Class 10 nuts.
Capscrew threads and seats SHALL be lubricated

when assembled.
Capscrew threads and seats SHALL NOT be

lubricated when assembled. These specifications
are based on all capscrews, nuts, and hardened
washers being phosphate and oil coated.
Unless instructions specifically recommend otherwise,

these standard torque values are to be used with
simple lithium base chassis grease (multi-purpose EP
NLGI) or a rust- preventive grease (see list, this page)
on the threads.
Torques are calculated to give a clamping force of
approximately 75% of proof load.
The maximum torque tolerance shall be 10% of
the torque value shown.
TABLE II. - STANDARD ASSEMBLY TORQUE
for 12-Point, Grade 9 Capscrews
NOTE: If zinc-plated hardware is used, each piece

must be lubricated with a Rust Preventive Grease or
Lithium-base grease to achieve the same clamping
forces provided below.
Torques are calculated to give a clamping force of
approximately 75% of proof load.
The maximum torque tolerance shall be within
10% of the torque value shown.
Table 3: - STANDARD METRIC ASSEMBLY TORQUE
CAPSCREW
SIZE*
TORQUE
ft. lbs.
TORQUE
N.m
TORQUE
kg.m
0.250 - 20
12
16
1.7
0.312 - 18
24
33
3.3
0.375 - 16
42
57
5.8
0.438 -14
70
95
9.7
0.500 -13
105
142
14.5
0.562 - 12
150
203
20.7
0.625 - 11
205
278
28.3
0.750 - 10
360
488
49.7
0.875 - 9
575
780
79.4
1.000 - 8
860
1166
119
1.000 - 12
915
1240
126
1.125 - 7
1230
1670
170
1.125 - 12
1330
1800
184
1.250 - 7
1715
2325
237
1.250 - 12
1840
2495
254
1.375 - 6
2270
3080
313
1.375 - 12
2475
3355
342
1.500 - 6
2980
4040
411
1.500 - 12
3225
4375
445
* Shank Diameter (in.) - Threads per inch

This table represents standard values only. Do not use these values to replace torque values which are specified in assembly
instructions.
CAPSCREW
SIZE*
TORQUE
N.m
TORQUE
ft.lbs.
TORQUE
kg.m
M6 x1
12
1.22
M8 x 1.25
30
22
3.06
M10 x 1.5
55
40
5.61
M12 x 1.75
95
70
9.69
M14 x 2
155
114
15.81
M16 x 2
240
177
24.48
M20 x 2.25
465
343
47.43
M24 x 3
800
590
81.6
M30 x 3.5
1600
1180
163.2
M36 x 4
2750
2028
280.5
* Shank Diameter (mm) - Threads per millimeter

This table represents standard values only. Do not use these values to replace torque values which are specified in assembly
instructions.
Suggested* Sources for Rust Preventive Grease:

AMERICAN ANTI-RUST GREASE #3-X from
Standard Oil Company (also American Oil Co.)
GULF NORUST #3 from Gulf Oil Company.
MOBILARMA 355, Product No. 66705 from Mobil
Oil Corporation.
RUST BAN 326 from Humble Oil Company.
RUSTOLENE B GREASE from Sinclair Oil Co.
RUST PREVENTIVE GREASE - CODE 312 from
the Southwest Grease and Oil Company.
NOTE: This list represents the current Engineering
approved sources for use in Komatsu manufacture. It is
not exclusive. Other products may meet the same
specifications of this list.
OM1200

Page 12-3
TABLE IV.
TORQUE CHART FOR JIC 37 SWIVEL NUTS
WITH OR WITHOUT O-RING SEALS
TABLE VI.
TORQUE CHART FOR
O-RING BOSS FITTINGS
SIZE
CODE
TUBE SIZE
(O.D.)
THREADS
UNF-2B
TORQUE
FT. LBS.
SIZE
CODE
TUBE SIZE
(O.D.)
THREADS
UNF-2B
TORQUE
FT. LBS.
0.125
0.312 24
4 1
0.125
0.312 24
4 2
0.188
0.375 24
8 3
0.188
0.375 24
5 2
0.250
0.438 20
12 3
0.250
0.438 20
8 3
0.312
0.500 20
15 3
0.312
0.500 20
10 3
0.375
0.562 18
18 5
0.375
0.562 18
13 3
0.500
0.750 16
30 5
0.500
0.750 16
24 5
10
0.625
0.875 14
40 5
10
0.625
0.875 14
32 5
12
0.750
1.062 12
55 5
12
0.750
1.062 12
48 5
14
0.875
1.188 12
65 5
14
0.875
1.188 12
54 5
16
1.000
1.312 12
80 5
16
1.000
1.312 12
72 5
20
1.250
1.625 12
100 10
20
1.250
1.625 12
80 5
24
1.500
1.875 12
120 10
24
1.500
1.875 12
80 5
32
2.000
2.500 12
230 20
32
2.000
2.500 12
96 10
TABLE V.
TORQUE CHART FOR
PIPE THREAD FITTINGS
TABLE VII.
TORQUE CHART FOR
O-RING FACE SEAL FITTINGS
SIZE
CODE
PIPE
THREAD
SIZE
WITH
SEALANT
FT. LBS.
WITHOUT
SEALANT
FT. LBS.
0.125 27
15 3
20 5
0.250 18
20 5
25 5
0.375 18
25 5
35 5
0.500 14
35 5
45 5
12
0.750 14
45 5
55 5
16
1.000 11.50
55 5
65 5
20
1.250 11.50
70 5
80 5
24
1.500 11.50
80 5
95 10
32
2.000 11.50
95 10
120 10
SIZE
CODE
TUBE SIZE
(O.D.)
THREADS
UNF-2B
TORQUE
FT. LBS.
0.250
0.438 20
11 1
0.375
0.562 18
18 2
0.500
0.750 16
35 4
10
0.625
0.875 14
51 5
12
0.750
1.062 12
71 7
16
1.000
1.312 12
98 6
20
1.250
1.625 12
132 7
24
1.500
1.875 12
165 15

Page 12-4
OM1200
TABLE VIII. TORQUE CONVERSIONS

Foot Pounds ft. lbs. To Newton-meters (N.m)
FT.
LBS.
(N.m)
1.36
2.71
4.07
5.42
6.78
8.14
9.49
10.85
12.20
10
13.56
14.91
16.27
17.63
18.98
20.34
21.69
23.05
24.40
25.76
20
27.12
28.47
29.83
31.18
32.54
33.90
35.25
36.61
37.96
39.32
30
40.67
42.03
43.39
44.74
46.10
47.45
48.81
50.17
51.52
52.87
40
54.23
55.59
56.94
58.30
59.66
60.01
62.37
63.72
65.08
66.44
50
67.79
69.15
70.50
71.86
73.21
74.57
75.93
77.28
78.64
80.00
60
81.35
82.70
84.06
85.42
86.77
88.13
89.48
90.84
92.20
93.55
70
94.91
96.26
97.62
98.97
100.33
101.69
103.04
104.40
105.75
107.11
80
108.47
109.82
111.18
112.53
113.89
115.24
116.60
117.96
119.31
120.67
90
122.03
123.38
124.74
126.09
127.45
128.80
130.16
131.51
132.87
134.23
See NOTE on page 12-5 regarding table usage
TABLE IX. TORQUE CONVERSIONS

Foot Pounds ft. lbs. To kilogram-meters (kg.m)
FT.
LBS.
(kg.m)
0.138
0.277
0.415
0.553
0.692
0.830
0.968
1.106
1.245
10
1.38
1.52
1.66
1.80
1.94
2.07
2.21
2.35
2.49
2.63
20
2.77
2.90
3.04
3.18
3.32
3.46
3.60
3.73
3.87
4.01
30
4.15
4.29
4.43
4.56
4.70
4.84
4.98
5.12
5.26
5.39
40
5.53
5.67
5.81
5.95
6.09
6.22
6.36
6.50
6.64
6.78
50
6.92
7.05
7.19
7.33
7.47
7.61
7.74
7.88
8.02
8.16
60
8.30
8.44
8.57
8.71
8.85
8.99
9.13
9.27
9.40
9.54
70
9.68
9.82
9.96
10.10
10.23
10.37
10.51
10.65
10.79
10.93
80
11.06
11.20
11.34
11.48
11.62
11.76
11.89
12.03
12.17
12.30
90
12.45
12.59
12.72
12.86
13.00
13.14
13.28
13.42
13.55
13.69

TABLE X. PRESSURE CONVERSIONS
Pounds/square inch (psi) To Kilopascals (kPa)
Formula: psi x 6.895 = kPa
PSI
(kPa)
6.895
13.79
20.68
27.58
34.47
41.37
48.26
55.16
62.05
10
68.95
75.84
82.74
89.63
96.53
103.42
110.32
117.21
124.1
131.0
20
137.9
144.8
151.7
158.6
165.5
172.4
179.3
186.2
193.1
200.0
30
206.8
213.7
220.6
227.5
234.4
241.3
248.2
255.1
262.0
268.9
40
275.8
282.7
289.6
296.5
303.4
310.3
317.2
324.1
331.0
337.9
50
344.7
351.6
358.5
365.4
372.3
379.2
386.1
393.0
399.9
406.8
60
413.7
420.6
427.5
434.4
441.3
448.2
455.1
462.0
468.9
475.8
70
482.6
489.5
496.4
503.3
510.2
517.1
524.0
530.9
537.8
544.7
80
551.6
558.5
565.4
572.3
579.2
586.1
593.0
599.9
606.8
613.7
90
620.5
627.4
634.3
641.2
648.1
655.0
661.9
668.8
675.7
682.6
OM1200

Page 12-5
TABLE XI. PRESSURE CONVERSIONS
Pounds/square inch (psi) To Megapascals (MPa)
Formula: psi x 0.0069 = MPa
PSI
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
(MPa)
0.069
0.14
0.21
0.28
0.34
0.41
0.48
0.55
0.62
100
0.69
0.76
0.83
0.90
0.97
1.03
1.10
1.17
1.24
1.31
200
1.38
1.45
1.52
1.59
1.65
1.72
1.79
1.86
1.93
2.00
300
2.07
2.14
2.21
2.28
2.34
2.41
2.48
2.55
2.62
2.69
400
2.76
2.83
2.90
2.96
3.03
3.10
3.17
3.24
3.31
3.38
500
3.45
3.52
3.59
3.65
3.72
3.79
3.86
3.93
4.00
4.07
600
4.14
4.21
4.27
4.34
4.41
4.48
4.55
4.62
4.69
4.76
700
4.83
4.90
4.96
5.03
5.10
5.17
5.24
5.31
5.38
5.45
800
5.52
5.58
5.65
5.72
5.79
5.86
5.93
6.00
6.07
6.14
900
6.21
6.27
6.34
6.41
6.48
6.55
6.62
6.69
6.76
6.83
See NOTE below regarding Table usage
NOTE: Tables such as Table VIII, IX, X, and XI may be used as in the following example:
Example: Convert 975 psi to kilopascals (kPa).
1. Select Table X.
2. Go to PSI row 90, column 7; read 668.8
97 psi = 668.8 kPa.
3. Multiply by 10:
970 psi = 6688 kPa.
4. Go to PSI row 0, column 5; read 34.475
psi = 34.47 kPa. Add to step 3.
5. 970 + 5 psi = 6688 + 34 = 6722 kPa.
TABLE XII. TEMPERATURE CONVERSIONS

Formula: F - 32 1.8 = C or C x 1.8 + 32 = F
CELSIUS
FAHRENHEIT
CELSIUS
FAHRENHEIT
CELSIUS
FAHRENHEIT
C
F
C
F
C
F
121
250
482
63
145
293
4
40
104
118
245
473
60
140
284
2
35
95
116
240
464
57
135
275
1
30
86
113
235
455
54
130
266
4
25
77
110
230
446
52
125
257
7
20
68
107
225
437
49
120
248
9
15
59
104
220
428
46
115
239
12
10
50
102
215
419
43
110
230
15
5
41
99
210
410
41
105
221
18
0
32
96
205
401
38
100
212
21
5
23
93
200
392
35
95
293
23
10
14
91
195
383
32
90
194
26
15
5
88
190
374
29
85
185
29
20
4
85
185
365
27
80
176
32
25
13
82
180
356
24
75
167
34
30
22
79
175
347
21
70
158
37
35
31
77
170
338
18
65
149
40
40
40
74
165
329
15
60
140
43
45
49
71
160
320
13
55
131
46
50
58
68
155
311
10
50
122
48
55
67
66
150
302
7
45
113
51
60
76
NOTE: The numbers in the unmarked columns refer to temperature in either degrees Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F). Select a number in
this unmarked column and read to the left to convert to degrees Celsius (C) or read to the right to convert to degrees Fahrenheit (F). If
starting with a known temperature (either C or F), find that temperature in the marked column and read the converted temperature in the
center, unmarked column.

Page 12-6
OM1200
TABLE XIII
COMMON CONVERSION MULTIPLIERS

ENGLISH To METRIC
To Convert
From

METRIC To ENGLISH
TO
Multiply
By
inch in.
millimeter (mm)
25.40
inch in.
centimeter (cm)
2.54
foot ft.
meter (m)
0.3048
meter (m)
yard yd.
meter (m)
0.914
meter (m)
yard yd.
1.0936
mile mi.
kilometer (km)
1.61
kilometer (km)
mile mi.
0.6210
sq. centimeters (cm2)
6.45
sq. centimeters (cm2)
sq. in. in.2
0.1550
sq. in. in.2

sq. ft.
ft.2
cu. in.
in.3
cu. in.
in.3
cu. ft.
ft.3
cu. ft.
ft.3
sq. centimeters (cm )

cu. centimeters
(cm3)
liters (l)
cu. meters
(m3)
liters (l)
929
TO
Multiply
By
millimeter (mm)
inch in.
0.0394
centimeter (cm)
inch in.
0.3937
foot ft.
3.2808
To Convert From
sq. centimeters
(cm2
16.39
cu. centimeters
(cm3)
0.016
liters (l)
0.028
cu. meters
28.3
liters (l)
0.001
in.3
0.061
61.02
sq. ft. ft.

cu. in.
cu. in. in.

(m3)
ounce oz.
kilogram (kg)
0.028
grams (g)
fluid ounce fl. oz.
milliliter (ml)
29.573
milliliter (ml)
pound (mass)
kilogram (kg)
0.454
kilogram (kg)
Newton (N)
4.448
Newton (N)
pound (force) lbs.
cu. ft.
ft.3
35.314
0.0353
cu. ft. ft.
ounce oz.
0.0353
fluid ounce fl. oz.
0.0338
pound (mass)
2.2046
pound (force) lbs.
0.2248
in. lbs. (force)
Newton.meters (N.m)
0.113
Newton.meters (N.m)
kilogram.meters (kg.m)
0.102
ft. lbs. (force)
Newton.meters (N.m)
1.356
Newton.meters (N.m)
ft. lbs. (force)
0.7376
ft. lbs. (force)
0.138
ft. lbs. (force)
7.2329
Newton.meters (N.m)
9.807
Newton.meters (N.m)
9.807
psi (pressure)
kilopascals (kPa)
6.895
psi (pressure)
megapascals (MPa)
kilogram.meters
(kg.m)
0.007
kilograms/cm (kg/cm )
0.0704
ton (short)
kilogram (kg)
907.2
ton (short)
metric ton
0.0907
quart qt.
liters (l)
0.946
gallon gal.
liters (l)
3.785
HP (horsepower)
Watts
745.7
HP (horsepower)
kilowatts (kw)
0.745
psi (pressure)
Kilopascals (kPa)
psi (pressure)
0.1450
megapascals (MPa)
psi (pressure)
145.038
kilograms/cm2 (kg/cm2)
psi (pressure)
14.2231
kilograms/cm2 (kg/cm2)
kilopascals (kPa)
98.068
kilogram (kg)
ton (short)
0.0011
metric ton
ton (short)
1.1023
liters (l)
quart qt.
1.0567
liters (l)
gallon gal.
0.2642
Watts
HP (horsepower)
0.00134
kilowatts (kw)
HP (horsepower)
1.3410
OM2034 10/04
General Safety - Section 20

Page 20-1
GENERAL SAFETY
Safety records of most organizations will show that the greatest percentage of accidents are caused by unsafe acts
of persons. The remainder are caused by unsafe mechanical or physical conditions. Report all unsafe conditions to
the proper authority.
The following safety rules are provided as a guide for the operator. However, local conditions and regulations may
add many more to this list.
Read and follow all safety precautions. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
Safety Rules
ONLY trained and authorized personnel can operate and maintain the machine.
Follow all safety rules, precautions and instructions when operating or performing maintenance on the
machine.
When working with another operator or a person on work site traffic duty, be sure all personnel understand all
hand signals that are to be used.
Safety Features
Be sure all guards and covers are in their proper position. Have guards and covers repaired if damaged. (See
Walk-Around Inspection, Operating Instructions - Section 30)
Learn the proper use of safety features such as safety locks, safety pins, and seat belts, and use these safety
features properly.
NEVER remove any safety features. ALWAYS keep them in good operating condition.
Improper use of safety features could result in serious bodily injury or death.
Clothing And Personal Items
Avoid loose clothing, jewelry, and loose long hair. They can catch on
controls or in moving parts and cause serious injury or death. Also, do not
wear oily clothes because they are flammable.
Wear a hard hat, safety glasses, safety shoes, mask or gloves when
operating or maintaining the machine. Always wear safety goggles, hard
hat and heavy gloves if your job involves scattering metal chips or minute
materials--this is so particularly when driving pins with a hammer and
when cleaning the air cleaner element with compressed air. Check also
that there is no one near the machine.
Unauthorized Modification
Any modification made to this vehicle without authorization from Komatsu can possibly create hazards.
Before making any modification, consult the authorized regional Komatsu distributor. Komatsu will not be
responsible for any injury or damage caused by any unauthorized modification.

Page 20-2
10/04 OM2034
Leaving The Operator's Seat
When preparing to leave the operator's seat, do not touch any control lever that is not locked. To prevent
accidental operations from occurring, always carry out the following:
Move the shift control lever to Neutral (N) and set the parking lever/switch to the PARKING position.
Lower the dump body, set the dump lever to the FLOAT position.
Stop the engine. When leaving the machine, always lock everything. Always remember to take the key with
you. If the machine should suddenly move or move in an unexpected way, this may result in serious bodily
injury or death.
Mounting And Dismounting
NEVER jump on or off the machine. NEVER get on or off a moving machine.
When getting on or off the machine, face the machine and use the hand-hold and steps.
Never hold any control levers when getting on or off the machine.
Always maintain three-point contact with the hand-holds and steps to ensure that you support yourself.
When bringing tools to the operator's compartment, always pass them by hand or pull them up by rope.
If there is any oil, grease, or mud on the hand-holds or steps, wipe it off immediately. Always keep these parts
clean. Repair any damage and tighten any loose bolts.
Use the handrails and steps marked by arrows in the diagram below when getting on or off the machine.
Fire Prevention For Fuel And Oil
Fuel, oil, and antifreeze can be ignited by a flame. Fuel is particularly FLAMMABLE and can be HAZARDOUS.
Keep flame away from flammable fluids.
Stop the engine and do not smoke when refueling.
Tighten all fuel and oil tank caps securely.
Refueling and oiling should be made in well ventilated areas.
Keep oil and fuel in the determined place and do not allow unauthorized persons to enter.
OM2034 10/04

Page 20-3
Precautions With High Temperature Fluids
Immediately after operations, the engine cooling water, engine oil, and hydraulic oil are at high temperature
and are under pressure. If the cap is removed, or the oil or water is drained, or the filters are replaced, there is
danger of serious burns. Always wait for the temperature to cool down, and carry out the operation according
to the specified procedure.
To prevent hot water from spurting out:

1) Stop the engine.
2) Wait for the water temperature to cool down.
3) Turn the cap slowly to release the pressure before removing the cap.
To prevent hot engine oil from spurting out:

1) Stop the engine.
2) Wait for the oil temperature to cool down.
3) Turn the cap slowly to release the pressure before removing the cap.
Asbestos Dust Hazard Prevention

Asbestos dust can be HAZARDOUS to your health if it is inhaled.If you handle
materials containing asbestos fibers, follow these guidelines as given below:
NEVER use compressed air for cleaning.
Use water for cleaning to keep down the dust.
Operate the machine with the wind to your back, whenever possible.
Use an approved respirator if necessary.
Prevention Of Injury By Work Equipment
Never enter or put your hand or arm or any other part of your body between movable parts such as the dump
body and chassis or cylinders. If the work equipment is operated, the clearance will change and this may lead
to serious bodily injury or death.
Fire Extinguisher And First Aid Kit
Be sure fire extinguishers have been provided and know how to use them.
Provide a first aid kit at the storage point.
Know what to do in the event of a fire.
Be sure you know the phone numbers of persons you should contact in case of
an emergency.

Page 20-4
10/04 OM2034
Precautions When Using Rops
If ROPS is installed, the ROPS must never be removed when operating the machine.
The ROPS is installed to protect the operator if the machine should roll over. It is designed not only to support
the load if the machine should roll over, but also to absorb the impact energy.
The ROPS installed on equipment manufactured and designed by Komatsu fulfills all of the regulations and
standards for all countries, but if it is modified or repaired without authorization from Komatsu or is damaged
when the machine rolls over, the strength will drop and it will not be able to fulfill its function properly. It can
only display its performance if it is repaired or modified in the specified way.
When modifying or repairing the ROPS, always consult the authorized regional Komatsu distributor.
Even if the ROPS is installed, it cannot show its full effect if the operator does not fasten the seat belt properly.
Always fasten the seat belt when operating.
Precautions For Attachments
When installing and using optional equipment, read the instruction manual for the attachment and the
information related to attachments in this manual.
Do not use attachments that are not authorized by Komatsu or the authorized regional Komatsu distributor.
Use of unauthorized attachments could create a safety problem and adversely affect the proper operation and
useful life of the machine.
Any injuries, accidents, and product failures resulting from the use of unauthorized attachments will not be the
responsibility of Komatsu, or the authorized regional Komatsu distributor.
Precautions For Starting Machine
START THE ENGINE FROM THE OPERATORS SEAT ONLY.
NEVER ATTEMPT TO START THE ENGINE BY SHORTING ACROSS THE

STARTER TERMINALS. This may cause fire, or serious injury or death to
anyone in machines path.
OM2034 10/04

Page 20-5
PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION

Safety Is Thinking Ahead
Prevention is the best safety program. Prevent a potential accident by knowing the employer's safety requirements and all necessary job site regulations. In addition, know the proper use and care of all the safety equipment
on the truck. Only qualified operators or technicians should attempt to operate or maintain the Komatsu Truck.
Safe practices start before the operator gets to the equipment!
Safety At The Worksite
When walking to and from the truck, maintain a safe distance from all machines even if the operator is visible.
Before starting the engine, thoroughly check the area for any unusual conditions that could be dangerous.
Examine the road surface in the job site and determine the best and safest method of operation.
Choose an area where the ground is as horizontal and firm as possible before carrying out the operation.
If you need to operate on a road, protect pedestrians and cars by designating a person for work site traffic duty
or by installing fences around the work site.
The operator must check personally the work position, roads to be used, and existence of obstacles before
starting operations.
Always determine the travel roads in the work site and maintain them so that it is always safe for the machines
to travel.
If travel through wet areas is necessary, check the depth and flow of water before crossing the shallow parts.
NEVER be in water which is in excess of the permissible water depth.
Fire Prevention
Thoroughly remove wood chips, leaves, paper and other flammable things
accumulated in the engine compartment. These could cause a fire.
Check fuel, lubrication, and hydraulic systems for leaks. Have any leaks
repaired. Wipe up any excess oil, fuel or other flammable fluids.
Be sure a fire extinguisher is present and in working condition.
Do not operate the machine near any flame.
Preparing For Operation
Always mount and dismount facing the truck. Never attempt to mount or dismount the truck while it is in motion.
Always use handrails and ladder when mounting or dismounting from the truck.
Check the deck areas for debris, loose hardware or tools. Check for people and objects that might be in the
way.
Become familiar with and use all protective equipment devices on the truck and insure that these items (antiskid material, grab bars, seat belts, etc.) are securely in place.
Ventilation In Enclosed Areas
If it is necessary to start the engine within an enclosed area, provide adequate

ventilation. Exhaust fumes from the engine can KILL.

Page 20-6
10/04 OM2034
In Operator's Cab - Before Starting The Engine
Do not leave tools or spare parts lying around in the operator's compartment or allow trash to accumulate in
cab of truck. Keep all unauthorized reading material out of truck cab.
Keep the cab floor, controls, steps, and handrails free of oil, grease, snow, and excess dirt.
Check the seat belt, buckle and hardware for damage or wear. Replace any worn or damaged parts. Always
use seat belts when operating your machine.
Read and understand the contents of this manual. Read Section 3 pertaining to safety and operating
instructions with special attention. Become thoroughly acquainted with all gauges, instruments and controls
before attempting operation of the truck.
Read and understand the WARNING and CAUTION decals in the operator's cab.
Insure steering wheel, horn, controls and pedals are free of any oil, grease or mud.
Check operation of windshield wiper, condition of wiper blades, and check washer reservoir for fluid level.
Be familiar with all steering and brake system controls and warning devices, road speeds and loading
capabilities, before operating the truck.
Mirrors, Windows, And Lights
Remove any dirt from the surface of the windshield and all cab windows and lights. Good visibility may prevent
an accident.
Adjust the rear view mirror to a position where the operator can see best from the operator's seat, and keep the
surface of the mirror clean. If any glass or light should break, replace it with a new part.
Insure headlights, work lights and taillights are in proper working order. Check that the machine is equipped
with the head lamps and working lamps needed for the operating conditions.
OPERATING THE MACHINE

When Starting The Engine
NEVER ATTEMPT TO START THE ENGINE BY SHORTING ACROSS THE STARTER TERMINALS. This
may cause fire, or serious injury or death to anyone in machines path.
NEVER start the engine if a warning tag has been attached to the control.
When starting the engine, sound the horn as an alert.
Start and operate the machine only while seated in the operators seat.
Do not allow any person other than the operator in the operator's compartment or any other place on the
machine.
Truck Operation - General
WEAR SEAT BELTS AT ALL TIMES.
Only authorized persons are allowed to ride in truck. Riders should be in cab only and belted in passenger
seat.
Do not allow anyone to ride on decks or steps of truck.
Do not allow anyone to get on or off truck while it is in motion.
Do not move truck into or out of a building without a signal person present.
Know and obey the hand signal communications between operator and spotter. When other machines and
personnel are present, the operator should move in and out of buildings, loading areas and through traffic,
under the direction of a signal person. Courtesy at all times is a safety precaution!
OM2034 10/04

Page 20-7
Report immediately to supervisor any conditions on haul road, pit or dump area that may cause an operating
hazard.
Check for flat tires periodically during shift. If truck has been run on a flat, it must not be parked in a
building until the tire cools. If tire must be changed, do not stand in front of rim and locking ring when
inflating tire mounted on the machine. Observers should not be permitted in the area and should be kept away
from the side of such tires.
Tire and rim assembly may explode if subjected to excessive heat. Personnel should move to a remote or
protected location if sensing excessively hot brakes, smell of burning rubber or evidence of fire near tire
and wheel area.
If the truck must be approached, such as to fight a fire, those personnel should do so only while facing the
tread area of the tire (front or back), unless protected by use of large heavy equipment as a shield. Stay at
least 50 ft. (15 m) from the tread of the tire.
In the event of fire in the tire and wheel area (including brake fires), stay away from the truck at least 8
hours or until the tire and wheel are cool.
Keep serviceable fire fighting equipment at hand. Report used extinguishers for replacement or refilling.
Always have parking brake applied when the truck is parked and unattended. DO NOT leave truck unattended
while engine is running.
When parking, park a safe distance from other vehicles as determined by supervisor.
Stay alert at all times! In the event of an emergency, be prepared to react quickly and avoid accidents. If an
emergency arises, know where to get prompt assistance.
Check When Traveling In Reverse

Before operating the machine or work equipment, do as follows:
Sound the horn to warn people in the area. For machines equipped with a
back-up alarm, check that the alarm works properly.
Check that there is no one near the machine. Be particularly careful to

check behind the machine.
If necessary, designate a person to check the safety. This is particularly

necessary when traveling in reverse.
When operating in areas that may be hazardous or have poor visibility, designate a person to direct work site
traffic.
Do not allow any one to enter the line of travel of the machine. This rule must be strictly observed even on
machines equipped with a back-up alarm or rear view mirror.
Traveling
When traveling on rough ground, travel at low speed. When changing direction, avoid turning suddenly.
Lower the dump body and set the dump lever to the FLOAT position when traveling.
If the engine should stop when the truck is traveling, the steering and brakes will continue to operate, but only
for a fixed amount of oil consumption. Steer immediately to a safe spot and stop the truck. As soon as the truck
has made a complete stop, apply parking brake.

Page 20-8
10/04 OM2034
Traveling On Slopes
Traveling on slopes could result in the machine tipping over or slipping.
Do not change direction on slopes. To ensure safety, go down to level ground before turning.
Do not travel up and down on grass, fallen leaves, or wet steel plates. These materials may make the machine
slip on even the slightest slope. Avoid traveling sideways, and always keep the travel speed low.
When traveling downhill, use the retarder to reduce speed. Do not turn the steering wheel suddenly. Do not
use the foot brake except in an emergency.
If the engine should stop on a slope, apply the service brakes fully stop the machine and apply the parking
brake after the machine has stopped.
Ensure Good Visibility
When working in dark places, install work lamps and head lamps, and set up lighting in the work area if
necessary.
Stop operations if the visibility is poor, such as in mist, snow, or rain, and wait for the weather to
improve to a condition that allows the operation to be carried out safely.
Operate Carefully On Snow
When working on snowy or icy roads, there is danger that the machine may slip to the side on even the
slightest slope, so always travel slowly and avoid sudden starting, turning, or stopping.
Be extremely careful when carrying out snow-clearing operations. The road shoulder and other objects are
buried in the snow and cannot be seen. When traveling on snow-covered roads, always install tire chains.
Avoid Damage To Dump Body
When working in tunnels, on bridges, under electric cables, or when entering a parking place or any other
place where there are height limits, always drive extremely carefully and lower the dump body completely
before driving the machine.
Driving Near High-voltage Cables
Going close to high-voltage cables can cause electric shock. Always maintain the safe distance given below
between the machine and the electric cable.
Voltage
Minimum Safety Distance
6.6 kV
3m
10 ft.
33.0 kV
4m
14 ft.
66.0 kV
5m
17 ft.
154.0 kV
8m
27 ft.
275.0 kV
10 m
33 ft.
The following actions are effective in preventing accidents:

1) Wear shoes with rubber or leather soles.
2) Use a signalman to give warning if the machine approaches too close to the electric cable.
If the work equipment should touch the electric cable, the operator should not leave the operator's
compartment.
When carrying out operations near high voltage cables, do not let anyone come close to the machine.
Check with the electrical maintenance department about the voltage of the cables before starting operations.
OM2034 10/04

Page 20-9
When Dumping
Before starting the dumping operation, check that there is no person or object behind the machine.
Stop the machine in the correct position, and check again that there is no person or object behind the machine.
Give the determined signal, then slowly operate the dump body. If necessary, use blocks for the wheels or
position a flagman.
When carrying out dumping operations on slopes, the machine stability will become poor and there is danger
that it may tip over. Always carry out such operations extremely carefully.
Do not travel with the dump body raised.
Working On Loose Ground
Avoid operating the machine too close to the edge of cliffs, overhangs, and deep ditches. If these areas
collapse, the machine could fall or tip over and result in serious injury or death. Remember that the soil after
heavy rain or blasting is weakened in these areas.
Earth laid on the ground and the soil near ditches is loose. It can collapse under the weight or vibration of the
machine. Avoid these areas, if possible.
When Loading
Check that the surrounding area is safe, stop the machine in the correct loading position, then load the body
uniformly.
Do not leave the operator's seat during the loading operation.
Parking The Machine
Choose a horizontal road surface to park the machine. If the machine has to be parked on a slope, always put
blocks under all the wheels to prevent the machine from moving.
When parking on public roads, provide fences and signs, such as flags or lights, on the machine to warn
pedestrians and other vehicles. Be sure that the machine, flags, or lights do not obstruct the traffic.
Before leaving the machine, lower the dump body fully, set the parking lever to the PARKING position, stop the
engine, then lock everything. Always take the key with you.
TOWING
When towing, fix wire to hook.
Towing in the wrong way may lead to serious personal injury or damage.
When using another machine to tow this machine, use a towing device with ample strength for the weight of
this machine.
Never tow a machine on a slope.
Do not use any towing rope that has kinks or is twisted.
Do not stand astride the towing cable or wire rope.
When connecting a machine that is to be towed, do not let any one come between the towing machine and the
machine that is being towed.
Set the coupling of the machine being towed in a straight line with the towing portion of the machine, and
secure it in position.
(For towing method, see Section 3, Operating Instructions, TOWING.)

Page 20-10
10/04 OM2034
WORKING NEAR BATTERIES

Battery Hazard Prevention
Battery electrolyte contains sulfuric acid and can quickly burn the skin and eat holes in clothing. If you spill acid
on yourself, immediately flush the area with water.
Battery acid could cause blindness if splashed into the eyes. If acid gets into the eyes, flush them immediately
with large quantities of water and see a doctor at once.
If you accidentally drink acid, drink a large quantity of water or milk, beaten egg or vegetable oil. Call a doctor
or poison prevention center immediately.
When working with batteries ALWAYS wear safety glasses or goggles.
Batteries generate hydrogen gas. Hydrogen gas is very EXPLOSIVE, and is easily ignited with a small spark of
flame.
Before working with batteries, stop the engine and turn the starting switch to the OFF position.
Avoid short-circuiting the battery terminals through accidental contact with metallic objects, such as tools,
across the terminals.
When removing or installing, check which is the positive (+) terminal and negative (-) terminal.
Tighten the battery cap securely.
Tighten the battery terminals securely. Loosened terminals can generate sparks and lead to an explosion.
Starting With Booster Cables
ALWAYS wear safety glasses or goggles when starting the machine with booster cables.
When starting from another machine, do not allow the two machines to touch.
Be sure to connect the positive (+) cable first when installing the booster cables. Disconnect the ground or
negative (-) cable first when removing them.
If any tool touches between the positive (+) terminal and the chassis, it will cause sparks. This is dangerous, so
be sure to work carefully.
Connect the batteries in parallel: positive to positive and negative to negative.
When connecting the ground cable to the frame of the machine to be started, be sure to connect it as far as
possible from the battery.
OM2034 10/04

Page 20-11
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE

BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE
Warning Tag
If others start the engine or operate the controls while you are performing
service or lubrication, you could suffer serious injury or death.
ALWAYS attach the WARNING TAG to the control lever in the operator's
cab to alert others that you are working on the machine. Attach additional
warning tags around the machine, if necessary.
These tags are available from your Komatsu distributor.
(Part No. 09963-03000)
Proper Tools
Use only tools suited to the task. Using damaged, low quality, faulty, or
makeshift tools could cause personal injury.
Stopping The Engine Before Service
When carrying out inspection or maintenance, always stop the machine on firm flat ground, lower the dump
body, then stop the engine.
If the engine must be run during service, such as when cleaning the radiator, always move the shift control
lever to the Neutral (N) position and set the parking brake lever to the PARKING position. Always carry out the
work with two people. One person should sit on the operator's seat to stop the engine if necessary. NEVER
move any controls not needed to operate.
When servicing the machine, be careful not to touch any moving part or get clothing caught.
Put blocks under the wheels.
When carrying out service with the dump body raised, always place the dump lever at the HOLD position, and
apply the lock (if equipped). Install the body-up safety pins (or cable) securely.
Securing The Dump Body

Any time personnel are required to perform maintenance on the vehicle with the dump body in the raised
position, the body-up retention cable MUST be
installed.
1. To hold the dump body in the up position, raise the
body to it's maximum height.
2. Remove cable (3) from its stored position on the
body, and install between rear body ear (1) and axle
housing ear (4).
3. Secure the cable clevis pins with cotter pins.
4. Return the cable to stored position (2) after maintenance is complete.

Page 20-12
10/04 OM2034
DURING MAINTENANCE
Personnel
Only authorized personnel can service and repair the machine. Extra precaution should be used when
grinding, welding, and using a sledge-hammer.
Attachments
Place attachments that have been removed from the machine in a safe place so
that they do not fall. If they fall on you or others, serious injury could result.
Work Under The Machine
Always lower all movable work equipment to the ground or to their lowest
position before performing service or repairs under the machine.
Always block the tires of the machine securely.
Never work under the machine if the machine is poorly supported.
Keep The Machine Clean
Spilled oil or grease, or scattered tools or broken pieces are dangerous

because they may cause you to slip or trip. Always keep your machine clean
and tidy.
If water gets into the electrical system, there is danger that the machine may
not move or may move unexpectedly. Do not use water or steam to clean the
sensors, connectors, or the inside of the operator's compartment.
Be extremely careful washing the electrical control cabinet. Do not allow any
water to enter the control cabinet around the doors or vents. Do not allow
any water to enter the cooling air inlet duct above the electrical control cabinet. If water enters the control
cabinet (through a vent or the cooling air system) major damage to the electrical components is possible.
Never spray water into the rear wheel electric motor covers. Damage to the wheel motor armature can occur.
Do not spray water into the retard grids. Excess water in the retard grids can cause a ground fault, which will
prevent propulsion.
Rules To Follow When Adding Fuel Or Oil
Spilled fuel and oil may cause slipping. Always clean up spills immediately.
Always tighten the cap of the fuel and oil fillers securely.
Never use fuel for washing any parts.
Always add fuel and oil in a well-ventilated place.
OM2034 10/04

Page 20-13
Radiator Water Level
If it is necessary to add water to the radiator, stop the engine and allow the
engine and radiator to cool down before adding the water.
Slowly loosen the cap to relieve pressure before removing the cap.
Use Of Lighting
When checking fuel, oil, coolant, or battery electrolyte, always use lighting
with anti-explosion specifications. If such lighting equipment is not used,
there is danger or explosion.
Precautions With The Battery
When repairing the electrical system or when carrying out electrical

welding, remove the negative (-) terminal of the battery to stop the flow
of current.
Handling High-pressure Hoses
Do not bend high-pressure hoses or hit them with hard objects. Do not use any bent or cracked piping, tubes or
hoses. They may burst during use.
Always repair any loose or broken fuel hoses or oil hoses. If fuel or oil leaks, it may cause a fire.
Precautions With High Pressure Oil
Do not forget that the work equipment circuits are always under pressure. In addition, the steering and brake
circuits may be pressurized even thought the engine is stopped.
Do not add oil, drain oil, or carry out maintenance or inspection before completely releasing the internal
pressure.
If oil is leaking under high pressure from small holes, it is dangerous if the jet of high-pressure oil hits the skin
or enters the eyes. Always wear safety glasses and thick gloves, and use a piece of cardboard or a sheet of
wood to check for oil leakage.
If you are hit by a jet of high-pressure oil, consult a doctor immediately for medical attention.

Page 20-14
Precautions When Performing Maintenance Near High Temperature Or High Pressure
Immediately after stopping operations, the engine cooling water and oil at
all parts are at high temperature and under high pressure.
In this condition, if the cap is removed, or the oil or water are drained, or the
filters are replaced, it may result in burns or other injury. Wait for the
temperature to go down, then carry out the inspection and maintenance in
accordance with the procedures given in this manual.
Rotating Fan And Belts
Keep away from rotating parts and be careful not to let anything get caught
in them.
If your body or tools touch the fan blades or fan belt, they may be cut off or
sent flying, so never touch any rotating parts.
Waste Materials
Never dump waste oil in a sewer system, rivers, etc.
Always put oil drained from your machine in containers. Never drain oil
directly on the ground.
Obey appropriate laws and regulations when disposing of harmful objects

such as oil, fuel, coolant, solvent, filters, batteries, and others.
10/04 OM2034
OM2034 10/04

Page 20-15
TIRES
Handling Tires
If tires are not used under the specified conditions, they may overheat and burst or be cut and burst by sharp
stones on rough road surfaces. This may lead to serious injury or damage.
To maintain safety, always keep to the following conditions:
Inflate the tires to the specified pressure. Abnormal heat is generated particularly when the inflation pressure is
too low.
Use the specified tires.
The tire inflation pressure and permissible speeds are general values. The actual values may differ depending on
the type of tire and the condition under which they are used. For details, please consult the tire manufacturer.
If the tires become hot, a flammable gas is produced, and this may ignite. It is particularly dangerous if the tires
become overheated when the tires are under pressure. If the gas generated inside the tire ignites, the internal
pressure will suddenly rise, and the tire will explode, and this may lead to serious personal injury. Explosions differ
from punctures or tire bursts, because the destructive force is extremely large. Therefore, the following operations
are strictly prohibited when the tire is under high internal pressure:
Welding the rim
Building fires or carrying out welding near the wheel or tire.
If the proper procedure for carrying out maintenance or replacement of the wheel or tire is not used, the wheel or
tire may burst and cause serious injury or damage. When carrying out such maintenance, please consult the
authorized regional Komatsu distributor, or the tire manufacturer.
Storing Tires After Removal
As a basic rule, store the tires in a warehouse which unauthorized persons cannot enter. If the tires are stored
outside, always erect a fence around the tires and put up No Entry and other warning signs that even young
children can understand.
Stand the tire on level ground, and block it securely so that it cannot roll or fall over.
If the tire should fall over, get out of the way quickly. The tires for construction equipment are extremely heavy,
so trying to hold the tire may lead to serious injury.

Page 20-16
10/04 OM2034
ADDITIONAL JOB SITE RULES
Use this space to add any ADDITIONAL Job Site Rules not covered in any of the previous discussions.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
OM2034 10/04

Page 20-17
WHEN REPAIRS ARE NECESSARY

1. Only qualified maintenance personnel who understand the systems being repaired should accomplish
repairs.
2. Many components on the Komatsu Truck are large and heavy. Insure that lifting equipment - hoists, slings,
chains, lifting eyes - are of adequate capacity to handle the lift.
3. DO NOT WORK under a suspended load. Do not work under raised body unless body safety cables, props,
or pins are in place to hold the body in up position.
4. Do not repair or service truck while engine is running, except when adjustments can only be made under such
conditions. Keep a safe distance from moving parts.
5. When servicing any air conditioning system with refrigerant, wear a face shield and cold resistant gloves for
protection against freezing. Be certain to follow all current regulations for handling and recycling refrigerants.
6. Follow package directions carefully when using cleaning solvents.
7. If an auxiliary battery assist is needed, first use one cable to connect the 24V positive (+) post of the disabled
truck batteries to the 24V positive (+) post of the auxiliary assist. Use second cable to connect the 24V negative (-) post of the auxiliary assist battery to a frame ground (-) on the disabled truck away from the battery.
8. Always disconnect the positive and negative battery cables of the vehicle before doing any welding on the
unit. Failure to do so may seriously damage the battery and electrical equipment. Disconnect battery charging
alternator lead wire and isolate electronic control components before making welding repairs. (It is not necessary to disconnect or remove any control circuit cards on Electric Drive Dump Trucks or any of the AID circuit control cards.)
Always fasten the welding machine ground (-) lead to the piece being welded; grounding clamp MUST BE
ATTACHED AS NEAR AS POSSIBLE to the weld area. Never allow welding current to pass through ball
bearings, roller bearings, suspensions, or hydraulic cylinders. Always avoid laying welding cables over or
near the vehicle electrical harnesses. Welding voltage could be induced into the electrical harness and possibly cause damage to components.
9. If truck is to be towed for any reason, use a rigid tow bar. Check truck cab for decal recommending special
towing precautions. (Also refer to Towing Procedure in OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.)
10. Drain, clean and ventilate fuel tanks and/or hydraulic tanks before making any welding repairs.
Any operating fluid, such as hydraulic oil or brake fluid escaping under pressure, can have sufficient force
to enter a person's body by penetrating the skin. Serious injury and possibly death may result if proper
medical treatment by a physician familiar with this injury is not received immediately.
11. Relieve pressure in lines or hoses before making any disconnects.
12. After adjustments or repairs, replace all shields, screens and clamps.
13. Tire Care:
Do not stand in front of rim and locking ring when inflating tire mounted on the machine. Observers should
not be permitted in the area and should be kept away from the side of such tires.
Do not weld or apply heat on the rim assembly with the tire mounted on the rim. Resulting gases inside the
tire may ignite, causing explosion of tire and rim.
14. Only a qualified operator or experienced maintenance personnel who are also qualified in operation should
move the truck under its own power in the repair facility or during road testing after repairs are complete

Page 20-18
10/04 OM2034
NOTES
OM2204
Warnings & Cautions - Section 22

Page 22-1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

The following pages give an explanation of the Warning, Caution, and Service Instruction plates and decals
attached to the truck. The plates and decals listed here are typical of this Komatsu model, but because of customer
options, individual trucks may have plates and decals that are different from those shown here.
The plates and decals must be kept clean and legible. If any decal or plate becomes unable to be read or damaged, it should be replaced with a new one.
A warning decal surrounds the key switch located to

the right of the steering column on the instrument
panel. The warning stresses the importance of reading the operator's manual before operation.
A Grade/Speed Retard plate is located on the left

front post of the operator's cab and provides the recommended MAXIMUM speeds to be used when
descending various grades with a loaded truck.
Always refer to the decal in the operator's cab.
The decal in the truck may differ from the decal
shown here due to OPTIONAL truck equipment such
as: wheelmotor drive train ratios, retarder grids, tire
sizes, etc.
A plate attached to the right rear corner of the cab

states the Rollover Protective Structure and Falling
Object Protective Structure meets various SAE performance requirements.
! WARNING! Do not make modifications to this
structure, or attempt to repair damage without
written approval from the Manufacturer. Unauthorized repairs will void certification.

Page 22-2
OM2204
A warning instruction is applied below the Parking Brake and the Rear Wheel Brake Lock switches, which are
located to the right of the steering column on the instrument panel. Pushing the top of the rocker-style switch turns
the function ON, pushing the bottom, turns it OFF.
The Parking Brake is spring applied and hydraulically released. It is designed to hold a stationary truck
when the engine is shutdown and keyswitch is turned Off. The truck must be completely stopped
before applying the parking brake, or damage may occur to parking brake.
To apply the parking brake, press the rocker switch toward the On symbol. To release the parking
brake, press the rocker switch toward the Off symbol. When the keyswitch is On and Parking Brake switch is
applied, the Parking Brake indicator light (A3, Overhead Panel) will be illuminated.
NOTE: Do not use the parking brake at shovel or dump. With keyswitch ON and engine running, sudden shock
caused by loading or dumping could cause the system's motion sensor to RELEASE the park brake.
The Wheel Brake Lock switch is for holding the truck while parked at the shovel during loading, or
while dumping. It applies the rear service brakes only. If the brake treadle valve does not operate,
apply this brake to stop the truck. Do NOT use this brake as a parking brake when leaving the truck.
With engine shut down, the hydraulic system will eventually bleed down, releasing the service brakes.
Attached to the exterior of both battery compartments is a

danger plate. This plate stresses the need to keep from
making any sparks near the battery. When another battery
or 24VDC power source is used for auxiliary power, all
switches must be Off prior to making any connections.
When connecting auxiliary power cables, positively maintain
correct polarity; connect the positive (+) posts together and
then connect the negative (-) lead of the auxiliary power
cable to a good frame ground. Do not connect to the negative posts of the truck battery or near the battery box.
This hookup completes the circuit but minimizes danger of
sparks near the batteries.
Sulfuric acid is corrosive and toxic. Use proper safety gear,
goggles, rubber gloves and rubber apron when handling
and servicing batteries. Get proper medical help immediately, if required.
OM2204
A warning plate is mounted on top of the radiator
surge tank cover near the radiator cap. The engine
cooling system is pressurized. Always turn the key
switch off and allow the engine to cool before
removing radiator cap. Unless the pressure is first
released, removing the radiator cap after the engine
has been running for a time will result in the hot coolant being expelled from the radiator. Serious scalding and burning can result.
Warning plates are mounted on the frame in front of,

and to the rear, of both front tires. All personnel in
this area are warned that the clearances change
when the truck is steered and could cause serious
injury.
Warning plates are attached to both the hydraulic

tank and fuel tank to alert technicians not to work on
the truck with the body in the raised position
unless body-up retention device (pins or cable) is in
position.
A plate on the side of the hydraulic tank furnishes

instructions for filling the hydraulic tank.
Keep the system open to the atmosphere only as
long as absolutely necessary to lessen chances of
system contamination. Service the tank with clean
Type C-4 hydraulic oil. All oil being put into the
hydraulic tank should be filtered through 3 micron filters.

Page 22-3

Page 22-4
A decal plate is located on the frame near the left
hoist cylinder which provides the operator or technician with the hook-up procedure for dumping a
loaded, disabled truck, by using a functional truck for
hydraulic power.
Refer to the Service manual for additional instructions for using this procedure.
A CAUTION decal is attached below the hydraulic

tank oil level sight gauge. Check level with body
down, engine stopped, and key switch Off. Add oil
per filling instructions, if oil level is below top of sight
glass.
A warning plate is attached to the frame above the

hydraulic system (APU) quick disconnect fittings to
inform technicians that high pressure hydraulic oil is
present during operation. When it is necessary to
open the hydraulic system, be sure engine is stopped
and key switch is Off to bleed down hydraulic pressure. There is always a chance of residual pressure
being present. Open fittings slowly to allow all pressure to bleed off before removing any connections.
Any operating fluid, such as hydraulic oil, escaping under pressure can have sufficient force to
enter a person's body by penetrating the skin.
Serious injury and possibly death may result if
proper medical treatment by a physician familiar
with this injury is not received immediately.
OM2204
OM2204
High Voltage Danger Plates and Caution Plates are

attached to the doors of the Electrical Control Cabinet. The High Voltage Plate is also attached to the
blown grid housing, extended range housing, rectifier
housing, inlet duct structure and rear hatch cover.
A warning plate is located above the hydraulic system (APU) quick disconnect fittings in front of the
hydraulic tank which provides instructions to the
operator or technician for towing a disabled truck.
This plate specifies the requirements for an auxiliary
source of supply for hydraulic oil and the proper
hookup.
TEST STEERING AND BRAKE SYSTEM OPERATION BEFORE TOWING.
A wheel motor oil level decal is attached to the gear

cover on both electric wheel motors. This decal
stresses the fact that the truck must be on a level
surface and parked for 20 minutes prior to checking
the oil level. This is necessary in order to get an
accurate reading.

Page 22-5

Page 22-6
Warning and Danger plates are located inside the
door of the brake system cabinet behind the cab.
This DANGER plate alerts technicians to read the
warning labels attached to the side of each of the
accumulators prior to releasing internal nitrogen
pressure or disconnecting any hydraulic lines or
hardware.
This WARNING plate alerts the technician to stop the
engine, turn off the key switch, and open the drain
valves on all three accumulators to bleed the hydraulic system pressure before disconnecting a brake
line.
This WARNING plate, attached to the automatic lube

system grease reservoir warns the technician not to
remove the reservoir cover. The grease reservoir
should be filled through the grease filter to prevent
contamination of the grease supply.
This Danger plate is attached to all four suspensions

and the steering accumulator.
The plate contains instructions for releasing internal
pressure before disconnecting any hydraulic lines or
hardware.
Serious injury can occur if these directions are not
followed.
OM2204
OM2204
Warning Plate is located near brake accumulators
inside the hydraulic components cabinet behind the
operators cab. This warning reminds the servicing
technicians to be sure to close the accumulator drain
valves after they have been opened to bleed brake
pressure. It further warns not to over-tighten the drain
valves to prevent damage to the valve seat(s).
A product identification plate is located on the frame

in front of the right side front wheel and gives the
Model Number, Maximum G.V.W. and Product Identification Number (PIN).
The Product Identification Number (PIN) consists of
19 total characters. The first and last characters are
tamper preventative symbols (*). The remaining 17
alpha/numeric characters are used to identify 5 characteristics of the machine. The 5 characteristics are
detailed below.
WMC - Character positions 1, 2 and 3 identify the
Worldwide Manufacturer Code (WMC). The WMC
designates the manufacturer of the product.
Komatsu brand products are identified with the letters
KMT.
MDS - Character positions 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 identify
the Machine Descriptor Section (MDS). The MDS
code identifies general information regarding
machine specifications. The MDS is a code for the
machine type and model.
CL - Character position 9 identify the Check Letter
(CL). The CL is used to verify the accuracy of the
individual PIN.
FC - Character positions 10 and 11 identify the Factory Code (FC). The FC identifies the Komatsu factory in charge of claims for the product. The FC for
electric drive trucks is 61.
SN - Character positions 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17
identify the Serial Number (SN). The SN is a unique
sequential number.

Page 22-7
OM2204
The Lubrication Chart is located on the right hand
side of the radiator grille and is for reference. Refer to
the Lubrication Section in this manual for more
complete lubrication instructions.

Page 22-8
OM3044
Operating Instructions - Section 30

Page 30-1
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
PREPARING FOR OPERATION
The safest trucks are those which have been properly
prepared for operation. At the beginning of each shift, a
careful check of the truck should be made by the operator before attempting to start the engine.
Safety Is Thinking Ahead
Prevention is the best safety program. Prevent potential accidents by knowing all of the employer's safety
requirements, all necessary job site regulations, as well
as the use and care of the safety equipment on the
truck. Only qualified operators or technicians should
attempt to operate or maintain the truck.
Safe practices start before the operator gets to the
equipment!
Wear the proper clothing. Loose fitting clothing,

unbuttoned sleeves and jackets, jewelry, etc.,
can catch on a protrusion and cause a potential
hazard.
Always use the personal safety equipment provided for the operator such as hard hat, safety
shoes, safety glasses or goggles. There are
some conditions when protective hearing
devices should also be worn for operator safety.
When walking to and from the truck, maintain a

safe distance from all machines even if the
operator is visible.
At The Truck - Ground Level Walk Around Inspection
At the beginning of each shift, a careful walk around
inspection of the truck should be made before the operator attempts engine start-up. A walk around inspection
is a systematic ground level inspection of the truck and
its components to insure that the truck is safe to operate before entering the operator's cab.
Start at the left front corner of the truck (see illustration,
next page), and move in a counter-clockwise direction,
front-to-rear, across the rear, and continuing forward
up the opposite side of the truck to the original starting
point.
If these steps are taken in sequence, and are repeated
from the same point and in the same direction before
every shift, many potential problems may be avoided,
or scheduled for maintenance. UNSCHEDULED downtime and loss of production can be reduced.
Local work practices may prevent an operator from

performing all tasks suggested here, but to the extent
permitted, the operator should follow this or similar routine.
1. Start at left front of truck (see illustration, next
page). While performing the walk around inspection, visually inspect all lights and safety equipment for external damage from rocks or misuse.
Make sure lenses are clean and unbroken.
Empty the dust pans on the left side air cleaner
assemblies.
2. Move behind the front of the left front tire, inspect
the hub and brake assemblies for leaks and any
abnormal conditions.
Check that all suspension attaching hardware is
secure, the suspension extension is correct, and
that there are no leaks.
3. With engine stopped, swing access ladder down.
If dark, turn on service light located to the right,
just above ladder by hand rail. Check engine oil
level.
4. Inspect fan and air conditioner belts for correct
tension, obvious wear, and tracking. Inspect fan
guard for security and condition. When leaving
this point, be sure ladder is up and secure, and
turn service light(s) OFF, if used.
5. Inspect anchor end of steering cylinder for proper
greasing and for security.
6. Move outboard of the front wheel, and inspect
attaching lugs/wedges to be sure all are tight and
complete. Check tires for cuts, damage or bubbles and that inflation appears to be correct.
Check sight glass for front wheel oil level.
7. Move behind the rear of the front wheel, inspect
for leaks at hub or brakes or any unusual conditions. Inspect suspension hardware to be sure it is
all in place. Inspect live end of steering cylinder
for proper greasing, and for security of all parts.
Inspect for any hydraulic leaks.
Swing hydraulic tank inspection ladder down.
Inspect sight glass on hydraulic reservoir, engine
should be stopped and body down, and fluid
should appear in lower sight glass.
8. Before leaving hydraulic tank be sure that ladder
is up and secure.

Page 30-2
OM3044
830E WALK-AROUND
OM3044
9. Move on around the hydraulic tank and in front of

the rear dual tires, inspect the hoist cylinder for
any damage and leaks, also that lower guard is in
place. Inspect both upper and lower hoist cylinder
pins for security, and for proper greasing.
10. Before leaving this position, look under the lower
edge of the chassis to be sure the flexible duct
that carries the air from the main blower to the
final drive housing is in good condition with no
holes or breakage. Also look up at the main
hydraulic pumps to see that there is no leakage or
any other unusual condition with pumps or pump
drive shafts.
11. Move on around the dual tires, check to see that
all lugs/wedges are in place and tight. Inspect
latches on wheel cover to be sure they are properly latched. Inspect wheel for any leakage that
may be coming from inside the wheel cover that
would indicate brake leakage, or wheel motor
leakage.
Check dual tires for cuts, damage or bubbles
and that inflation appears to be correct. If truck
has been run on a flat, the tire must be cooled
before parking truck inside. Inspect for any rocks
that might be lodged between dual tires, and that
rock ejector is in good condition and straight so
that it can not damage a tire.
12. Inspect left rear suspension for damage and for
proper inflation, and that there are no leaks.
Inspect also for proper greasing, and that covers
over the chrome piston are in good condition.
13. Open rear hatch cover, turn ON work light, if necessary. Inspect for leaks around wheelmotor
mounting to rear housing, and also brake hoses
and fittings. Be sure that covers on wheel motor
sump are in place, and that there are no rags or
tools left behind. Inspect condition of hatch cover
gasket, report any bad gasket to maintenance.
Turn OFF work light if used, close and latch
hatch.
14. While standing in front of rear hatch, look up to
see that rear lights are in good condition, along
with dual back up horns. Look up at panhard rod
to see that it is getting proper greasing. Also look
at both body hinge pins for greasing and any
abnormal condition. Check hoist limit switch.
Remove any build-up of mud/debris.

Page 30-3
17. Perform the same inspection for wheel lugs/
wedges, wheel cover latches, and for leaks that
was done on the left hand dual wheels.
18. Move in front of right dual tires, and inspect the
hoist cylinder the same as was done on the left
side.
19. Move on around the fuel tank, inspect the fuel
quantity gauge (if equipped - this should agree
with the fuel gauge in the cab). Inspect the attaching hardware for the fuel tank at the upper saddles, and then at the lower back of the tank for the
security and condition of the resilient mounts.
20. Move in behind the right front wheel, and inspect
the steering cylinder, suspension attaching hardware and suspension extension, as well as greasing and attaching hardware for the steering
cylinder. Inspect the hub and brakes for leaks and
any unusual condition. Be sure the suspension
protective boot is in good condition.
21. Move out and around the right front wheel, inspect
that all lugs/wedges are in place and tight.
22. Move in behind the front of the right front wheel,
check hub and brakes for leaks and any unusual
condition. Check hoist filters for leaks. Inspect
steering cylinder for security and for proper greasing. Inspect the engine compartment for any leaks
and unusual condition. Inspect the fan guard, and
belts also for any rags or debris behind radiator.
Turn work light OFF, if used, and secure the ladder up and latched.
23. Move on around the front of the truck, drop the air
cleaner pans to remove dirt, latch up and secure.
24. As you move in front of the radiator, inspect for
any debris that might be stuck in front of the radiator and remove it. Check for any coolant leaks.
Inspect all head and fog lights.
25. Before climbing ladder to first level, be sure
ground level engine shutdown switch is ON.
Inspect fire control actuator to be sure safety pin
is in place and plastic tie that prevents accidental
actuation is in place and in good condition.
26. Climb ladder to main deck. Always use grab rails
and ladder when mounting or dismounting from
the truck. Clean ladder and hand rails of any foreign material, such as ice, snow, oil or mud.
15. Perform the same inspection on the right rear suspension as done on the left.
16. Move on around the right dual tires, inspect
between the tires for rocks, and for condition of
the rock ejector, inspect the tires for cuts or damage, and for correct inflation.
Always mount and dismount ladders facing the

truck. Never attempt to mount or dismount while
the truck is in motion.

Page 30-4
27. Observe coolant level through opening in end of
hood. When checking coolant in radiator, relieve
pressure slowly before removing radiator cap.
OM3044
1. Insure all personnel are clear of truck before starting engine. Always sound the horn as a warning
before actuating any operational controls.
2. Check and insure Selector Switch is in NEUTRAL
position and the park brake switch is in the ON
position before starting.
If engine has been running, allow coolant to cool,

before removing the fill cap or draining radiator.
Serious burns may result if coolant is not allowed
to cool.
28. Be sure battery disconnect switches are on.
Inspect covers over retarding grids to be sure
latches are in place and secure. Be sure battery
box hold down wing nuts are in place and secure.
Inspect main air inlet to be sure it is clear. Be sure
all cabinet door latches are secure.
29. Move on around the cab to the back, open the
doors to the brake cabinet, inspect for leaks.
Before latching doors, turn work lights OFF, if
used.
30. Clean cab windows and mirrors; clean out cab
floor as necessary. Insure steering wheel, controls and pedals are free of any oil, grease or
mud.
31. Stow personal gear in cab so that it does not interfere with any operation of the truck. Dirt or trash
build-up, specifically in the operator's cab, should
be cleared. Do not carry tools or supplies in cab of
truck or on the deck.
3. If truck is equipped with auxiliary cold weather

heater system(s);
DO NOT attempt to start engine while heaters
are in operation. DAMAGE TO COOLANT
HEATERS WILL RESULT!
4. The keyswitch is a three position (OFF, RUN,
START) switch. When switch is rotated one position clockwise, it is in the RUN position and all
electrical circuits (except START) are activated.
With Selector Switch in NEUTRAL, rotate keyswitch fully clockwise to START position and hold
this position until engine starts. START position is
spring loaded to return to RUN when key is
released. If the truck is equipped with a Komatsu
engine, a time delay will occur before starter
engagement and engine cranking begins. The
Komatsu engine is equipped with a Prelub System that circulates engine oil throughout the
engine prior to startup. The colder the engine oil,
the longer the delay before cranking begins. In
addition, if the engine is equipped with the Engine
Starting Aid for cold weather starting, the Engine
Prelub System should be engaged FIRST for 5
to 10 seconds, or until the starters are engaged,
BEFORE activating the Engine Starting Aid.
32. Adjust seat and steering wheel so that it is comfortable for use.
33. If the truck is in an enclosure, insure adequate
ventilation before start-up. Exhaust fumes are
dangerous!
ENGINE START-UP SAFETY PRACTICES
NEVER ATTEMPT TO START THE ENGINE BY

SHORTING ACROSS THE STARTER TERMINALS.
This may cause fire, or serious injury or death to
anyone in machines path.
START THE ENGINE FROM THE OPERATORS
SEAT ONLY.
Starting fluid is extremely volatile and flammable!

Use with extreme care.
If truck is equipped with optional Engine Starting Aid
and ambient temperature is below 50F (10C), turn
the keyswitch to the START position, and while cranking engine, move the Engine Starting Aid switch to the
ON position for three (3) seconds MAXIMUM; then
release Engine Starting Aid. If engine does not start,
wait at least fifteen (15) seconds before repeating the
procedure.
Do not crank an electric starter for more

than 30 seconds.
Allow two minutes for cooling before

attempting to start engine again.
Severe damage to starter motor can result
from overheating.
OM3044
AFTER ENGINE HAS STARTED

1. After engine has started, do not accelerate engine
speed or drive truck until low pressure and warning systems are normal, and the coolant temperature is at least 160F (71C).
2. Become thoroughly familiar with steering and
emergency controls. Test the truck steering in
extreme right and left directions. If the steering
system is not operating properly, shut engine
down immediately. Determine the steering system
problem and have repairs made before resuming
operation.
3. Operate each of the truck's brake circuits at least
twice prior to operating and moving the truck.
These circuits include individual activation from
the operator's cab of the service brake, parking
brake, and brake lock (also emergency brake, if
equipped). With the engine running and with the
hydraulic circuit fully charged, activate each circuit
individually. If any application or release of any
brake circuit appears sluggish or improper, or if
warning alarms are activated on application or
release, shut the engine down and notify maintenance personnel. Do not operate truck until brake
circuit in question is fully operational.
4. Check gauges, warning lights and instruments
before moving the truck to insure proper system
operation and proper instrument functioning. Give
special attention to braking and steering circuit
hydraulic warning lights. If warning lights come
on, shut down the engine immediately and determine the cause.
5. Insure headlights, worklights and taillights are in
proper working order. Good visibility may prevent
an accident. Check operation of windshield wiper.
6. When truck body is in dump position, do not allow
anyone beneath it unless body-up retaining pin or
cable is in place.
7. Do not use the fire extinguisher for any purpose
other than putting out a fire! If extinguisher is discharged, report the occurrence so the used unit
can be refilled or replaced.
8. Do not allow unauthorized personnel to ride in the
truck. Do not allow anyone to ride on the ladder of
the truck.
9. Do not leave truck unattended while engine is
running. Shut down engine before getting out of
cab.

Page 30-5
MACHINE OPERATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

After the truck engine is started and all systems are
functioning properly, the operator must follow all local
safety rules to insure safe machine operation.
If any of the red warning lights turn ON or if any

gauge reads in the red area during truck operation,
a malfunction is indicated. Stop truck as soon as
safety permits, shut down engine if problem indicates and have problem corrected before resuming
truck operation.
Operating truck with stalled or free spinning wheel

motors may cause serious damage to wheel
motors! If truck does not begin to move within 10
seconds after depressing throttle pedal (Selector
Switch in a drive position), release throttle pedal
and allow wheels to regain traction before accelerating engine again.
1. Always look to the rear before backing the truck.
Watch for and obey ground spotter's hand sign
before making any reverse movements. Sound
the warning horn (3 blasts). Spotter should have a
clear view of the total area at the rear of the truck.
2. Operate the truck only while properly seated with
seat belt fastened. Keep hands and feet inside
the cab compartment while truck is in operation.
3. Check gauges and instruments frequently during
operation for proper readings.
4. Observe all regulations pertaining to the job site's
traffic pattern. Be alert to any unusual traffic pattern. Obey the spotter's signals.
5. Match the truck speed to haul road conditions and
slow the truck in any congested area. Keep a firm
grip on steering wheel at all times.
6. Do not allow engine to run at IDLE for extended
periods of time.
7. Check parking brake periodically during shift. Use
parking brake ONLY for parking. Do not use park
brake for loading/dumping. Do not attempt to
apply parking brake while truck is moving!

Page 30-6
Do not use Brake Lock or Emergency Brake (if

equipped) for parking.
8. Check brake lock performance periodically for
safe loading and dump operation.
9. Proceed slowly on rough terrain to avoid deep
ruts or large obstacles. Avoid traveling close to
soft edges and the edge of fill area.
10. Truck operation requires concentrated effort by
the driver. Avoid distractions of any kind while
operating the truck.
LOADING
1. Pull into the loading area with caution. Remain at
a safe distance while truck ahead is being loaded.
2. Do not drive over unprotected power cables.
3. When approaching or leaving a loading area,
watch out for other vehicles and for personnel
working in the area.
4. When pulling in under a loader or shovel, follow
Spotter or Shovel Operator signals. The truck
operator may speed up loading operations by
observing the location and loading cycle of the
truck being loaded ahead, then follow a similar
pattern.
5. When being loaded, operator should stay in truck
cab. Place Selector Switch in NEUTRAL and
apply brake lock with engine running.
6. When loaded, pull away from shovel as quickly as
possible but with extreme caution.
HAULING
1. Always stay alert! If unfamiliar with the road, drive
with extreme caution. Cab doors should remain
closed at all times if truck is in motion or unattended.
2. Obey all road signs. Operate truck so it is under
control at all times. Govern truck speed by the
road conditions, weather and visibility. Report
haul road conditions immediately. Muddy or icy
roads, pot holes or other obstructions can present
hazards.
3. When backing the truck, give backup signal (three
blasts on the horn); when starting forward, two
blasts on the horn. These signals must be given
each time the truck is moved forward or backward.
4. Use extreme caution when approaching a haul
road intersection. Maintain a safe distance from
oncoming vehicles.
OM3044
5. Maintain a safe distance when following another

vehicle. Never approach another vehicle from the
rear, in the same lane, closer than 50 ft. (15 m).
When driving on a down grade, this distance
should not be less than 100 ft. (30 m).
6. Do not stop or park on a haul road unless
unavoidable. If you must stop, move truck to a
safe place, apply parking brake, block wheels
securely, shut down engine and notify maintenance personnel for assistance.
7. Before starting up or down a grade, maintain a
speed that will insure safe driving and provide
effective retarding under all conditions. Refer to
Grade/Speed decal in operator's cab.
8. When operating truck in darkness, or when visibility is poor, do not move truck unless headlights
are on. Do not back truck if backup horn or lights
are inoperative. Always dim headlights when
meeting oncoming vehicles.
9. If the Emergency Steering light and/or Low Brake
Pressure Warning light (if equipped) illuminate
during operation, steer the truck immediately to a
safe stopping area, away from other traffic, if possible. Refer to item 6 above.
10. The Statex III system monitors wheel motor,
ambient, and static exciter temperatures. If wheel
motor or static exciter temperature is outside the
limits established, the Statex III controls will cause
the engine to increase to 1650 RPM. (Normal
engine RPM for haul road/retarding operation is
1250 RPM.)
11. When maximum truck speed is reached, the truck
will experience a DECREASE in engine RPM.
12. Check tires for proper inflation periodically during
shift. If truck has been run on a flat, or underinflated tire, it must not be parked in a building
until the tire cools.
PASSING
1. Do not pass another truck on a hill or blind curve!
2. Before passing, make sure the road ahead is
clear. If a disabled truck is blocking your lane,
slow down and pass with extreme caution.
3. Use only the areas designated for passing.
OM3044
DUMPING
1. Pull into dump area with extreme caution. Make
sure area is clear of persons and obstructions,
including overhead utility lines. Carefully maneuver truck into dump position. Obey signals
directed by the spotter, if present.
2. Avoid unstable areas. Stay a safe distance from
edge of dump area.
Position truck on a solid, level surface before
dumping.
As body raises, the truck Center of Gravity (CG)

will move. Truck must be on level surface to prevent tipping / rolling!
3. When in dump position, apply Brake Lock and
move Selector Switch to the NEUTRAL position.
To Raise Body:
The dumping of very large rocks (10% of payload,

or greater) or sticky material (loads that do not flow
freely from the body) may allow the material to
move too fast and cause the body to move RAPIDLY and SUDDENLY. This sudden movement may
jolt the truck violently and cause possible injury to
the operator, and/or damage to the hoist cylinders,
frame, and/or body hinge pins. If it is necessary to
dump this kind of material, refer to the CAUTION in
the following procedure:
4. Pull the lever to
the rear to actuate hoist circuit.
(Releasing
the
lever anywhere
during HOIST UP
will place the
body in hold at
that position.)

Page 30-7
5. Raise engine RPM to accelerate hoist speed.
Refer to the CAUTION below.
If dumping very large rocks, or sticky materials, as

described in the previous WARNING, slowly accelerate engine RPM to raise body. When the material
starts to move, release hoist lever to HOLD position. If material does not continue moving and clear
body, repeat this procedure until material has
cleared body.
6. Reduce engine RPM as last stage of hoist cylinder begins to extend and let engine go to low idle
as last stage reaches half-extension.
7. Release hoist lever as last stage of hoist cylinder
reaches full extension.
To Lower Body:
When dumping over a berm or into a crusher:
8. Move hoist lever forward to DOWN position and
release. Releasing the lever places hoist control
valve in the FLOAT position allowing the body to
return to frame.
NOTE: If dumped material builds up at the rear of the
body and the body cannot be lowered, perform steps
a & b below:
a. Move hoist lever back to the HOIST position to
fully raise the dump body. Then release the
hoist lever so it returns to the HOLD position.
NOTE: DO NOT drive forward if the tail of body will not
clear the crusher wall in the fully raised position.
b. Shift Selector Switch to FORWARD, release
Brake Lock, depress Override button and drive
forward to clear the material. Stop, shift Selector Switch to NEUTRAL, apply Brake Lock and
lower body again.
NOTE: Failure to HOIST the body after making an
unsuccessful attempt at lowering the body may result
in the dump body suddenly lowering after the truck has
pulled ahead of the material that was previously
preventing the body from lowering.
CAUTION! The truck is not to
be moved with the dump body
raised except for emergency
moves only. Failure to lower
body before moving truck may
cause damage to hoist cylinders, frame and/or body hinge
pins.

Page 30-8
To Lower Body:
When dumping on flat ground:
It is very likely when dumping on flat ground that the
dumped material will build up enough to prevent the
body from lowering. In this case, the truck will have to
be driven forward a short distance (just enough to clear
the material) before the body can be lowered.
a. Shift Selector Switch to FORWARD, release
just far enough forward for body to clear material. Stop, shift Selector Switch to NEUTRAL,
apply Brake Lock.
b. Move hoist lever forward to DOWN position
and release. Releasing the lever places hoist
control valve in the FLOAT position allowing
the body to return to frame.
NOTE: If dumped material builds up at the rear of the
body and the body cannot be lowered, then perform
steps c and d below:
c. Move hoist lever back to the HOIST position to
fully raise the dump body. Then release the
hoist lever so it returns to the HOLD position.
d. Shift Selector Switch to FORWARD, release
forward to clear the material. Stop, shift Selector Switch to NEUTRAL, apply Brake Lock and
lower body again.
NOTE: Failure to hoist the body after making an
unsuccessful attempt at lowering the body may result
in the dump body suddenly lowering after the truck has
pulled ahead of the material that was previously
preventing the body from lowering.
CAUTION! The truck is not
to be moved with the dump
body raised except for
emergency moves only.
Failure to lower body
before moving truck may
cause damage to hoist cylinders, frame and/or body
hinge pins.
9. With body returned to frame, move Selector
Switch to FORWARD, release Brake Lock, and
leave dump area carefully.
OM3044
TOWING
Prior to towing a truck, many factors must be carefully
considered. Serious personal injury and/or significant
property damage may result if important safety practices, procedures and preparation for moving heavy
equipment are not observed.
Do not tow the truck faster than 5 MPH (8 KPH).
A disabled machine may be towed after the following
MINIMUM precautions have been taken.
1. Shut down engine.
2. Chock wheels on disabled truck to prevent movement while attaching tow bar.
3. If truck is equipped, install hydraulic connections
for steering/braking and dumping between towing
and towed vehicles. Check towed vehicle for normal braking and steering system operation.
4. Empty all material from dump body of truck that is
to be towed.
5. Inspect tow bar for adequacy (approximately 1.5
times the gross vehicle weight of truck being
towed).
6. Determine that towing vehicle has adequate
capacity to both move and stop the towed truck
under all conditions.
7. Protect both operators in the event of tow bar failure.
8. Release disabled truck brakes and remove blocking.
9. Sudden movement may cause tow bar failure.
Smooth and gradual truck movement is preferred.
10. Minimize tow angle at all times - NEVER EXCEED
30.
The towed truck must be steered in the direction
of the tow bar.
OM3044
SUDDEN LOSS OF ENGINE POWER

If the engine suddenly stops, there is enough hydraulic
pressure stored in the brake and steering accumulators
to allow the operation of the steering and brake functions. However, this oil supply is limited so it is important to stop the truck as quickly and safely as possible
after the loss of engine power. If the brake supply pressure drops to a pre-determined level, the Low Brake
Pressure warning light will illuminate and a buzzer will
sound. If the brake pressure continues to decrease, the
Auto-Apply feature will activate and the service
brakes will apply automatically to stop the truck. Apply
parking brake as soon as the truck comes to a complete stop.

Page 30-9
2. The parking brake must be applied and/or chocks
placed fore/aft of wheels so that the truck cannot
roll. Each truck should be parked at a reasonable
distance from another.
3. Haul roads are not safe parking areas. In an
emergency, pick the safest spot most visible to
other machines in the area. If the truck becomes
disabled where traffic is heavy, mark the truck
with warning flags in daylight or flares at night.
ENGINE SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE

The following procedure should be followed at each
engine shutdown.
Dynamic retarding will not be available!

Do not use the service brakes for continuous
retarding purposes.
1. Bring the truck to a safe stop as quickly as possible by using the foot pedal to apply the service
brakes. If possible, steer the truck to the side of
the road while bringing it to a complete stop.
2. Apply the parking brake as soon as the truck has
stopped moving.
3. Turn key switch OFF and notify maintenance personnel immediately.
4. If safe to do so, place wheel chocks in front or
behind the wheels so that truck cannot roll.
5. If the truck becomes disabled where traffic is
heavy, mark the truck with warning flags in daylight or flares at night.
1. Stop truck. Reduce engine RPM to low idle. Place

Selector Switch in NEUTRAL and apply Parking
Brake switch.
Refer to the DELAYED ENGINE SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE if the option for a five (5) minute engine idle
period is desired.
2. Allow engine to cool gradually by running at low
idle for 3 to 5 minutes.
3. With truck stopped and engine cooled down, turn
keyswitch counterclockwise to OFF for normal
shutdown of engines. If engine does not shutdown with keyswitch, use Engine Shutdown
Switch on the operator's center console (see
Operator Controls section) and hold this switch
down until engine stops.
4. With keyswitch OFF, and engine stopped, wait at
least 90 seconds. Insure steering circuit is completely bled down by turning steering wheel back
and forth several times. No front wheel movement
will occur when hydraulic pressure is relieved.
NOTE: A switch is located at the right front corner of
truck for ground level engine shutdown.
SAFE PARKING PROCEDURES

The operator must continue the use of safety precautions when preparing for parking and engine shutdown.
In the event that the equipment is being worked in consecutive shifts, any questionable truck performance the
operator may have noticed must be checked by maintenance personnel before the truck is released to
another operator.
1. The truck should be parked on level ground, if at
all possible. If parking must be done on a grade,
the truck should be positioned at right angles to
the grade.
5. Close and lock all windows, remove key from keyswitch and lock cab to prevent possible unauthorized truck operation. Dismount truck properly.

Page 30-10
DELAYED ENGINE SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE

1. Stop the truck out of the way of other traffic on a
level surface and free of overhead power lines or
other obstructions (in case dump body should
need to be raised).
OM3044
NOTE: To cancel the 5 Minute Idle Timer sequence,

press Timer Delay Shutdown switch to the OFF (lower)
position.
If keyswitch is in OFF position, engine will stop.

If keyswitch is in ON position, engine will continue to run.
a. Reduce engine speed to low idle.

b. Place the directional Selector Switch (2, Figure
32-5) in NEUTRAL.
c. Apply the Parking Brake
switch (13, Figure 32-6).
Be sure the parking
brake applied indicator
light in the overhead display panel is illuminated.
2. Refer to Instrument Panel

and Indicator Lights for the
location of the Engine Shutdown Switch with 5 Minute
Idle Timer Delay (2, Figure
32-6). This is a 3-position
rocker-type switch (OFFON-MOMENTARY).
Press top of switch to the ON (center position), then
press firmly to the MOMENTARY (upper position) and
hold this position briefly to activate the 5 Minute Idle
Timer (switch is spring-loaded to return to ON position
when released).
At the SAME time while holding the MOMENTARY
switch position, turn the Keyswitch counterclockwise to the OFF position.
When the engine stops after the 5 minute idle period,
the hydraulic bleeddown timer will be activated and
turn OFF the 24 VDC electric circuits controlled by the
keyswitch.
Engine WILL NOT SHUT DOWN, if keyswitch is not

turned OFF in this manner.
If engine does not shutdown with keyswitch,

use Engine Shutdown Switch (8, Figure 32-5)
on operator cab center console, and hold this
switch down until engine stops. The Ground
Level Shutdown Switch will also stop the engine
during this time-out.
d. When
the
Engine
Shutdown Timer has
been activated, the
Timer Delay indicator
light in the overhead
display panel (C4, Figure 32-7) will illuminate
to indicate that the
shutdown
timing
sequence has been started. The engine will
continue to run at Idle RPM for approximately 5
minutes to allow for proper engine cool-down
before stopping.
3. After engine has stopped, perform steps 4 and 5,
as described in NORMAL ENGINE SHUTDOWN
PROCEDURE above.
OM3044
Reserve Engine Oil System (Optional)

The reserve oil tank for the engine is designed to add
more oil capacity to the engine and to make less frequent servicing of the engine oil. The circulation of oil
between the engine sump and reserve tank increases
the total volume of working oil. This dilutes the effects
of contamination and loss of additives and maintains
the oil quality over longer periods. A filter in the supply
circuit protects the pumping unit and prevents transfer
of contaminants to the engine sump which might enter
the tank during servicing. It also gives an added level of
oil cleanup.
Operation

Page 30-11
NOTE: Do not use the oil in the reserve tank to fill the
engine sump. Both must be at proper level before
starting engine.
The engine oil level should be checked with the engine
dipstick at every shift change. If the oil level in the
engine is incorrect, check for proper operation of the
reserve engine oil system.
The oil level in the reserve tank must also be checked
at every shift change. Oil must be visible in the middle
sight gauge (12). If not, add oil to the reserve tank by
using the quick fill system utilizing the tank fill pump (3).
For filling instructions, refer to the "Lubrication and Service" section.
Engine oil is circulated between the engine sump and

the reserve tank by two electrically driven pumps within
a single pumping unit (11, Figure 30-1). The pump unit
is mounted on the side of the reserve tank. The pump
unit is equipped with an LED monitor light on one side.
Pump 1 (in the pump unit) draws oil from the engine
sump at a preset control point (determined by the
height of the suction tube). Oil above this point is withdrawn and transferred to the reserve tank (9). This lowers the level in the engine sump until air is drawn.
Air reaching the pumping unit activates Pump 2 (in the
pump unit) which returns oil from the reserve tank and
raises the engine sump level until air is no longer
drawn by Pump 1. Pump 2 then turns OFF. The running level is continuously adjusted at the control point
by alternation between withdrawal and return of oil at
the sump.
LED Monitor Light
Steady - Pump 1 is withdrawing oil from the

engine sump and bringing down the oil level.
Regular Pulsing - Pump 2 is returning oil to the

engine sump and raising the oil level.
Irregular Pulsing - Oil is on the correct running

level.
Changing Oil
Drain both the engine sump and the reserve tank. Refill
both engine and reserve tank with new oil to proper levels.
Change engine and reserve tank filters as required.
Start engine and check for proper operation.
FIGURE 30-1. RESERVE ENGINE OIL

SYSTEM
1. Oil Suction
2. Oil Tank Fill
3. Fill Valve
4. Engine Fill Line
5. Oil Level Sensor
6. Air Valve
7. Tank Fill Line
8. Fill Cap
9. Reserve Oil Tank
10. Engine Fill Line
11. Pump Unit
12. Sight Gauge
13. Tank Return Line
14. Oil Filter

Page 30-12
OM3044
NOTES:
OM3215 10/04

Page 32-1
OPERATOR CAB AND CONTROLS
FIGURE 32-1. CAB INTERIOR - OPERATOR VIEW

1. Steering Wheel
2. Service Brake Pedal
(See Note, page 3-13)
3. Retarder Pedal
4. Throttle (Accelerator) Pedal
5. Heater/Air Conditioner Vents
6. Heater/Air Conditioner Controls

7. Instrument Panel
8. Grade/Speed Chart
9. Radio Speakers
10. Warning Alarm Buzzer
11. Radio - AM/FM Stereo
12. Warning Lights Dimmer

Control
13. Warning/Status Indicator
Lights
14. Air Cleaner vacuum Gauges
15. Windshield Wipers

Page 32-2
STEERING WHEEL AND CONTROLS
10/04 OM3215
MULTI-FUNCTION TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
The steering wheel (1, Figure 32-2) will telescope in

and out and adjust through a tilt angle to provide a
comfortable wheel position for most operators.
Horn Button
FIGURE 32-3. MULTI-FUNCTION TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
The horn (2, Figure 32-2) is actuated by pushing the

button in the center of the steering wheel. Operation of
the horn should be verified before moving the truck.
Observe all local safety rules regarding the use of the
horn as a warning signal device before starting engine
and moving the vehicle.
Multi-function turn signal switch (4, Figure 32-2) is used

to activate the turn signal lights, the windshield wipers,
and to select either high or low beam headlights.
Tilt / Telescope Lever
TURN SIGNAL OPERATION

Move the lever upward to signal a turn to
the right.
The steering column can be telescoped or the wheel

tilted with the lever (3, Figure 32-2) in front of the turn
signal lever.
Adjust the tilt of the steering wheel by pulling the lever
toward the steering wheel and moving the wheel to the
desired angle. Releasing the lever will lock the wheel in
the desired location.
Adjust the telescope function by pushing the lever forward to unlock. After positioning as desired, release
the lever to lock position.
An indicator in the top, center of the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate turn direction
selected. Refer to Instrument Panel and Indicator
Lights in this section.
Move the lever downward to signal a turn
to the left.
Note: The turn signal will not automatically stop
after turn has been completed.
HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHT OPERATION
Moving the lever inward toward the rear
of the cab changes the headlights to
high beam. When the high beams are
selected, the indicator in the top, center of the
instrument panel will illuminate. Moving the switch
back to the original position will return the headlights to low beam.
WINDSHIELDINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Windshield wipers off.
Intermittent - Long Delay
Intermittent -Medium Delay
Intermittent -Short Delay
Low Speed
High Speed
FIGURE 32-2. STEERING WHEEL AND CONTROLS

1. Steering Wheel
2. Horn
3. Tilt/Telescope Lever
4. Multi-Function Turn
Signal Switch
Depressing the button at the end of

the lever will activate the windshield
washer.
Note: Windshield wipers will not
automatically start upon washer activation.
OM3215 10/04
PEDALS
Service Brake Pedal
The Service Brake Pedal (2, Figure 32-3) is a foot-operated pedal which applies the service brakes.

Page 32-3
Throttle Pedal
The Throttle Pedal (4, Figure 32-3) is a foot-operated
pedal which allows the operator to control engine RPM,
depending on pedal depression.
NOTE: In some OPTIONAL installations, this pedal

may not be present, because it is incorporated into a
single pedal function with the Retarder Pedal (3).
Dynamic Retarder Pedal
The Dynamic Retarder Pedal (3, Figure 32-3) is a
foot-operated pedal which allows the operator to slow
the truck and maintain a safe productive speed without
the use of the service brakes. For normal truck operation, only dynamic retarding should be used to slow
and control the speed of the truck. The Grade/Speed
Chart (8, Figure 32-1) should always be followed to determine MAXIMUM safe truck speeds for descending
various grades with a loaded truck. Service brakes
should be applied only when dynamic retarding requires additional braking force to slow the truck speed
quickly and to bring the truck to a complete stop.
When dynamic retarding is in operation, the engine
RPM will automatically go to an advance RPM retard
speed setting (usually 1250 RPM)*. Dynamic retarding
will be applied automatically, if the speed of the truck
reaches the predetermined overspeed retard setting.
Dynamic Retarding is available in FORWARD/REVERSE at all truck speeds above 0 mph/kph, but is
available in NEUTRAL only when truck speed is above
3 mph (4.8 kph).
* NOTE: The exact engine speed in retarding may vary
(1250 - 1650 RPM) due to the temperature of certain
components; this is controlled by the Statex III control
system.
Optional - Dual Function / Single Pedal
The Dynamic Retarding/Brake Pedal is a single
foot-operated pedal which controls both retarding and
service brake functions. Thus, the operator must first
apply, and maintain, full dynamic retarding in order to
apply the service brakes.
When the pedal is partially depressed, the dynamic retarding is actuated (actuation is modulated). As the
pedal is further depressed, dynamic retarding is fully
applied; then, while maintaining full retarding, the service brakes are actuated (a slight increase in pedal resistance will be felt) through a hydraulic valve, which
modulates pressure to the service brakes. Completely
depressing the pedal causes full application of
both dynamic retarding AND the service brakes.
FIGURE 32-4. PEDALS, VENTS

2. Service Brake Pedal
3. Retard Pedal
4. Throttle Pedal
5. Vents

Page 32-4
HEATER / AIR CONDITIONER COMPARTMENT AND CONTROLS

The heater/air conditioner compartment contains the
heater/air conditioner controls (6, Figure 32-1) and the
heater/air conditioner components, such as the blower
motor assembly and heater coils. Optimum cab air climate can be selected by using the following controls in
various combinations.
10/04 OM3215
Heater/air Conditioner Vents

These heater/air conditioner vents (6, Figure 32-5) may
be rotated 360. Air flow through the vents is controlled
by manually opening/closing or turning the louvers.
Defroster Vent Control Switch

The defroster control switch (1, Figure 32-5) directs
heated air for windshield defrosting. DOWN position of
the toggle switch is OFF. The UP position of the toggle
switch is ON.
Heat Vent Control Switch
The heater control (2, Figure 32-5) directs heated air to
the cab floor for heating of the cab. The DOWN position of the toggle switch is OFF. The UP position of the
toggle switch is ON.
Temperature Control Knob
The temperature control knob (3, Figure 32-5) adjusts
the outlet air temperature of the heater/air conditioner.
Rotating the knob counterclockwise (blue arrow) will
select cooler temperatures. Full counterclockwise position is the coldest air setting.
Rotating the knob clockwise (red arrow) will select
warmer temperatures. Full clockwise position is the
warmest heater setting.
Fan Control Knob
The fan control knob (4, Figure 32-5) controls the
3-speed heater/air conditioner internal fan unit. Full
counterclockwise is the OFF position. Rotating the
knob clockwise selects increasingly higher fan speeds.
Heater/air Conditioner Selector Switch
Selector switch (5, Figure 32-5) allows the operator to
select heat A/C, or niether. The left position of the
switch activates the air conditioning and the right side
of the switch activates the heater. The middle position
is OFF. Niether the heat nor the air conditioning can
be activated in this position.
NOTE: The air conditioner will not operate unless the
fan control knob is turned ON.
FIGURE 32-5. A/C & HEATER CONTROLS

1. Defroster Control
2. Outside/Inside Air
3. Heater Control
4. Temperature Control
5. Fan Control
6. Selector Switch
OM3215 10/04

Page 32-5
OVERHEAD PANEL AND DISPLAY
Radio Speakers
The items listed below are located on teh overhead

panel. Refer to Figure 32-1 for the location of each
item. Abrief description of each component is
described below.
Radio Speakers (9, Figure 32-1) for the AM/FM Stereo

radio are located at the far left and right of the overhead panel.
Grade/speed Warning Chart

The Grade/Speed WARNING chart (8, Figure 32-1 and
also shown below) provides the recommended MAXIMUM truck speeds for descending various grades with
a loaded truck. The operator should reference this
chart before descending any grade with a loaded truck.
Proper use of Dynamic Retarding will maintain a safe
speed.
DO NOT exceed these recommended MAXIMUM
speeds when descending grades with a loaded truck.
Warning Alarm Buzzer

This alarm (10, Figure 32-1) will sound when activated
by any one of several truck functions. Refer to Instrument Panel and Indicator Lights, for a detailed description of functions and indicators that will activate
this alarm.
Cab Radio
This panel will normally contain an AM/FM Stereo radio
(11, Figure 32-1). Refer to Section 6, Optional Equipment, for a more complete description of the radio and
its functions. Individual customers may use this area
for other purposes, such as a two-way communications
radio.
Warning Lights Dimmer Control
This control knob (12, Figure 32-1) permits the operator to adjust the brightness of the Warning Indicator
Lights.
Status / Warning Indicator Light Panel
This panel (13, Figure 32-1) contains an array of indicator lights to provide the operator with important status messages concerning selected truck functions.
Refer to Instrument Panel and Indicator Lights, for a
detailed description of these indicators.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wipers (15, Figure 32-1) are powered
by an electric motor. Refer to Instrument Panel and Indicator Lights, for location and description of the windshield wiper and washer controls.
The sample chart above applies to a model 830E

equipped with GE787 wheel motors with 31.875:1 gear
ratio, 40R57 tires, and 14 element 3-step retarding
grids. This decal may change with OPTIONAL truck
equipment such as: wheelmotor gear ratios, retarder
grids, tire sizes, etc. ALWAYS refer to this decal in
the operator's cab, and follow these recommendations for truck operation.

Page 32-6
10/04 OM3215
CENTER CONSOLE
Air Cleaner Vacuum Gauges

The air cleaner vacuum gauges (14, Figure 32-1) provide a continuous reading of maximum air cleaner restriction reached during operation.
The air cleaner(s) should be
serviced when the gauge(s)
shows the following maximum
recommended restriction:
Komatsu
SDA16V160 or SSDA16V160
Engine:
25 inches of H2O vacuum.
F-n-r Selector Switch

The Selector Switch (2, Figure 32-6) is mounted on a
console to the right of the operator's seat. It is a three
position switch which controls the Forward-Neutral-Reverse motion of the truck. When the Selector Switch
handle is in the center N position, it is in NEUTRAL.
The handle must be in Neutral to start the engine.
NOTE: After service, push the reset button on face of

gauge to allow the gauge to return to zero.
The operator can select Forward

drive by moving the handle forward.
Reverse drive can be selected by

moving the handle to the rear.
The truck should be stopped before
the selector handle is moved to a
drive position.
The Center Console (1, Figure 32-6)

contains:
1. Center Console
2. F-N-R Selector Switch
3. Hoist Control Lever
4. Ash Tray
5. Cigar/Cigarette Lighter
6. L.H. Window Control Switch
7. R.H. Window Control Switch
8. Engine Shutdown Switch
9. Override Switch
10. BLANK - not used on this truck
11. RSC OFF/ON Switch
12. Retarder Speed Control Dial
13. Diagnostic Port - G.E. Propulsion
System
14. Engine Diagnostic Port (CENSE)
15. Modular Mining Port (Optional)
16. Passenger Seat
(mounted on top of the right hand
portion of the Console structure)
17. Engine Diagnostic Port
(QUANTUM)
18. Not Used on this truck
19. Data Store Button
20. Service Engine Light (Blue)
FIGURE 32-6. CENTER CONSOLE
OM3215 10/04

Page 32-7
Hoist Control Lever
Ash Tray
The hoist control (3, Figure 32-6) is a four position

hand-operated lever located between the operator seat
and the Center Console.
The Ash Tray(4, Figure 32-6) is used for extinguishing

and depositing smoking materials. DO NOT use for
flammable materials, such as paper wrappers. Be certain that all fire ash is extinguished!
Lighter
The LIGHTER (5, Figure 32-6) may be used for lighting
cigars/cigarettes. Always use CAUTION with smoking materials!.
This socket may also be used for a 12 VDC power supply.
L.h. Window Control Switch
This switch (6, Figure 32-6) is spring-loaded to the OFF
position. Pushing the front of the switch raises the left
side cab window. Pushing the rear of the switch lowers
the window.
R.h. Window Control Switch
To Raise Body:
1. Pull the lever to the rear to actuate hoist circuit.
(Releasing the lever anywhere during HOIST will
place the body in Hold at that position.)
This switch (7, Figure 32-6) is spring-loaded to the OFF

position. Pushing the front of the switch raises the right
side cab window. Pushing the rear of the switch lowers
the window.
2. Raise engine RPM to increase hoist speed.
Engine Shutdown Switch
3. Reduce engine RPM as the last stage of the hoist

cylinders begin to extend and then let the engine
go to low idle as the last stage reaches half-extension.
4. Release hoist lever as the last stage reaches full
extension.
5. After material being dumped clears the body,
lower the body to frame.
Refer to OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, DUMPING
for more complete details concerning this control.
To Lower Body:
Move hoist lever forward to DOWN position and release. Releasing the lever places the hoist control
valve in the normal FLOAT position, allowing the body
to return to frame.
This switch (8, Figure 32-6) is

used for engine shutdown by
depressing this button and holding it until engine stops.
Use this switch to shutdown engine if engine does not

shutdown by turning keyswitch OFF, or to shutdown
engine without turning OFF 24 VDC electric circuits.
There is also a ground level engine shutdown switch
on the right front frame rail behind the ladder.

Page 32-8
Override Switch
This push-button
switch (9, Figure
32-6) is
spring-loaded to
the OFF position.
When pushed in
and held, this
switch may be
used for several
functions:
1. The override switch permits the operator to move
the truck forward when the Selector Switch is in
Forward, the dump body is raised, and the brakes
are released.
! Use of the override switch for this purpose is
intended for emergency situations only!
2. If the operator stops the truck on an uphill incline,
the override switch can be used to set up forward
propulsion while the brakes are applied. As soon
as forward propulsion is felt, completely release
the brakes and as truck begins to move forward,
release the override switch.
3. The push button deactivates the retard pedal
function when speed of truck is below 3 mph (4.8
kph).
4. The override switch is also used to reset an electric system fault when indicated by the red warning light (Refer to Instrument Panel And Indicator
Lights, Overhead Warning/Status panel).
10, Figure 32-6: BLANK
This position is not currently used.
10/04 OM3215
Push the Retard Speed Control

Switch knob IN to turn OFF.
IN
OFF
Pull the Retard Speed Control Switch

knob OUT to turn the system ON.
OUT
ON
Retard Speed Control (RSC) Adjust Dial

The RSC Adjust Dial (12, Figure 32-6) allows the operator to vary the downhill truck speed that the Retard
Speed Control system will maintain when descending a
grade.
When the dial is rotated counterclockwise
toward this symbol, the truck will descend
a grade at lower speeds.
When the dial is rotated clockwise toward
this symbol, the truck speed will increase.
Retard Speed Control (RSC) Off/on Switch

The Retard Speed Control Switch (11, Figure 32-6)
turns the system OFF or ON.
Throttle pedal position will override RSC setting. If the

operator depresses the throttle pedal to increase truck
speed, Dynamic Retarding will not come on unless
truck overspeed setting is reached or foot operated retard pedal is used. When the throttle pedal is released
and RSC switch is ON, Dynamic Retarding will come
on at, or above, the RSC dialed speed and will adjust
truck speed to, and maintain, the dialed speed.
OM3215 10/04
To adjust the RSC control, pull switch (11) ON and

start with dial (12) rotated toward fastest speed while
driving truck at desired maximum speed. Relax throttle
pedal to let truck coast and turn RSC Adjusting Dial
slowly counterclockwise until Dynamic Retarding is activated. Dynamic Retarding will now be activated automatically anytime the set speed is reached, the RSC
switch is ON, and throttle pedal is released.
With RSC switch ON and dial adjusted, the system will
function as follows: As truck speed increases to the
set speed and throttle pedal released, dynamic retarding will apply. As truck speed tries to increase, the
amount of retarding effort will automatically adjust to
keep the selected speed. When truck speed decreases, the retarding effort is reduced to maintain the
selected speed. If truck speed continues to decrease to
approximately 3 mph (4.8 kph) below set speed, Dynamic Retarding will turn off automatically. If truck
speed must be reduced further, the operator can turn
the Adjust Dial to a new setting or depress the foot operated retard pedal.
If the operator depresses the foot operated retard
pedal and the retard effort called for is greater than that
from the automatic system, the foot pedal retard will
override RSC.
Statex III Propulsion System Diagnostic Connector
This 9-pin connector (13, Figure 32-6) is for use by
qualified personnel to access G.E. STATEX III electric
propulsion diagnostic information and data. Refer to
Section E for additional information.
Komatsu Engine Quantum Connector
This connector (17, Figure 32-6) is for use by qualified
personnel to access engine diagnostic information for
the QUANTUM system. Refer to engine manufacturers
service publications for troubleshooting information.

Page 32-9
Data Store Button
This button (19, Figure 32-6) is for use by qualified
maintenance personnel to record in memory a snapshot of the Statex III drive system.
Passenger Seat
The passenger seat (16, Figure 32-6) is mounted on
top of the right hand portion of the Center Console
structure.
The area beneath the passenger seat provides a cabinet for various 24 VDC electrical components. Refer to
Section D for service involving any of these components.
Service Engine Light (Blue)
The service engine light (20, Figure
32-6) will illuminate if a problem is
detected by the electronic engine
monitoring system.
Electric propulsion and dynamic
retarding will still be available.
If this light is ON, notify maintenance personnel so they
can diagnose and repair the problem the next time the
truck is in the shop for repairs or at the next PM (Preventative Maintenance) interval.
Payload Meter
The Payload Meter (1, Figure 32-7) is used to provide
management with operational data such as tonnage
hauled and cycle times. The download connector (2,
Figure 32-7) is used with a special cable to allow the
Payload Meter (1) to communicate with a Portable
Computer.
Refer to Section 60, Optional Equipment, for a more
complete description of the payload meter and its functions.
Komatsu Engine Cense Connector

This 3-pin connector (14, Figure 32-6) is for use by
qualified personnel to access engine diagnostic information for the CENSE system. Refer to engine manufacturers service publications for troubleshooting
information.
Unused Connector
This connector (18, Figure 32-6) location is not used
for this model truck.
Modular Mining Port Conector
This connector (15, Figure 32-6) location is used if the
optional Modular Mining System is installed on the
truck.
FIGURE 32-7. PAYLOAD METER III

1. Payload Meter III
2. Download Connector

Page 32-10
10/04 OM3215
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

CONTROL SYMBOLS
Many control functions are identified with international symbols that the operator should learn to recognize immediately. The operator must understand the function and operation of each instrument and control. This knowledge is
essential for proper and safe operation of the machine.
The following symbols are general indicators and may appear in multiple locations and combinations on the instrument panel.
This symbol may be used

alone or with another symbol.
This symbol identifies the OFF
position of a switch or control.
This symbol when it appears

on an indicator or control identifies that this indicator or control is NOT used.
This symbol may be used

alone or with another symbol.
This symbol identifies the ON
position of a switch or control.
This symbol identifies a rotary

control or switch. Rotate the
knob clockwise or counterclockwise for functions.
This symbol identifies the

PUSHED IN position of a
push-pull switch or control.
This symbol identifies a switch

used to test or check a function. Press the switch on the
side near the symbol to perform the test.
This symbol identifies the

PULLED OUT position of a
push-pull switch or control.
OM3215 10/04

Page 32-11
INSTRUMENT PANEL GAUGES, INDICATORS, & CONTROLS

The operator and service technician must understand the function and operation of each instrument and control.
Control functions are identified with international symbols that the operator should learn to recognize immediately.
This knowledge is essential for proper and safe operation.
Note: Items that are marked OPTIONAL do not apply to every truck.
FIGURE 32-8. INSTRUMENT PANEL GAUGES, INDICATORS & CONTROLS

1. Keyswitch
2. Engine Shutdown Switch with Timer Delay
(Optional)
3. Fog Light Switch (Optional)
4. Ladder Light Switch
5. Backup Light Switch
6. Panel Illumination Light(s)
7. Vent(s) - Cab Air Conditioner/Heater
8. Engine Starting Aid Switch (Optional)
9. Rotating Beacon Light Switch (Optional)
10. Heated Mirror Switch (Optional)
11. Blank - Not Used In This Application
12. Wheel Brake Lock Switch
13. Parking Brake Switch
14. Digital Tachometer
15. Right Turn Signal Indicator Light
16. High Beam Headlight Indicator Light

17. Left Turn Signal Indicator Light
18. Digital Speedometer / Payload Meter
19. Voltmeter Gauge
20. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
21. Engine Water Temperature Gauge
22. Fuel Gauge
23. Blank(s) - Not Used In This Application
24. Engine Hourmeter
27. Headlight Switch
28. Panel Illumination Lights Dimmer Rheostat
29. Payload Meter Switch

Page 32-12
10/04 OM3215
Key Switch
Key switch (1, Figure 32-8) is a 3-position (OFF, RUN, START) switch.
Starting
When the switch is rotated one position clockwise, it is in the RUN position and all electrical circuits (except
START) are activated.
With the Selector Switch in NEUTRAL, rotate keyswitch fully clockwise to START position and hold this
position until engine starts. START position is spring loaded to return to RUN when key is released. If the
engine is equipped with a Prelub system, a noticeable delay will occur before cranking begins. Refer to
Section A, Engine Startup Safety Practices for detailed instructions.
With truck stopped, turn keyswitch counterclockwise to OFF for normal engine shutdown.
Use the Engine Shutdown switch on center console, if engine does not shutdown with keyswitch.
NOTE: A ground level shutdown switch is located near the diagonal ladder steps on right front corner of truck.
Engine Shutdown Switch With Timer Delay (Optional)

This is a 3-position (OFF-ON-MOMENTARY) rocker type switch (2, Figure 32-8). Refer to Operating Instructions
section, DELAYED ENGINE SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE, for a complete detailed operation of this switch.
1. Press top of switch to the ON (center position), then press firmly to the MOMENTARY
(upper position) and hold this position briefly to activate the 5 Minute Idle Timer (switch
is spring-loaded to return to ON position when released). Turn the Keyswitch counterclockwise to the OFF position. When the engine stops after the 5 minute idle period, the
hydraulic bleeddown timer will be activated and turn OFF the 24 VDC electric circuits
controlled by the keyswitch.
Engine WILL NOT SHUT DOWN, if keyswitch is not

turned OFF in this manner.
NOTE: To cancel the 5 Minute Idle Timer sequence,
press Timer Delay Shutdown switch to the OFF (lower)
position.
If keyswitch is in OFF position, engine will stop.

If keyswitch is in ON position, engine will continue to run.
If engine does not shutdown with keyswitch, use Engine Shutdown Switch on operator cab center console,
and hold this switch down until engine stops. The Ground Level Shutdown Switch will also stop the engine
during this time-out.
2. When the Engine Shutdown Timer has been activated, the Timer Delay indicator
light in the overhead display panel (C4, Figure 32-9) will illuminate to indicate that the
shutdown timing sequence has been started. The engine will continue to run at Idle
RPM for approximately 5 minutes to allow for proper engine cool-down before stopping.
OM3215 10/04

Page 32-13
Fog Lights (Optional)

Fog Lights (3, Figure 32-8) are optional equipment that are useful in foggy conditions and
heavy rain. Pressing the top of the rocker switch turns the lights ON. Pressing the bottom of
the switch turns the lights OFF.
Ladder Light Switch

The switch turns the ladder lights (4, Figure 32-8) ON or OFF after or before using ladder.
Pressing the top of the rocker switch turns the lights ON. Pressing the bottom of the switch
turns the lights OFF. Another switch is mounted at the right front of truck near the base of the
ladder.
Manual Backup Switch

The Manual Backup Switch (5, Figure 32-8) allows backup lights to be turned ON providing
added visibility and safety when the Selector Switch (see OPERATOR CONTROLS) is not in
REV position. When the SWITCH is pressed toward the ON position, the MANUAL BACK UP
LIGHT indicator (B4, Overhead Panel) will be illuminated.
Panel Illumination Lights

Panel illumination lights (6, Figure 32-8) provide illumination for the instrument panel. Brightness is controlled by the panel light dimmer switch (28).
Cab Air Conditioner / Heater Vents

These vents (7, Figure 32-8) are spherically mounted and may be directed by the operator to
provide the most comfortable cabin air flow.
Engine Cold Weather Starting Aid (Optional)
The OPTIONAL Engine Starting Aid switch (8, Figure 32-8) is spring-loaded to the OFF position. Use only when ambient temperature is below 50F (10C). When switch is held in the
ON position, ether is injected into the engine intake manifold to aid engine starting in cold
weather. Move the Engine Starting Aid switch to the ON position while cranking engine, for
three (3) seconds maximum, and then release Engine Starting Aid. If engine does not start,
wait at least fifteen (15) seconds before repeating the procedure. Refer to Operating Instructions, for more specific operating details.
Rotating Beacon Light Switch (Optional)

If truck is equipped with the OPTIONAL Rotating Beacon Light, it will be activated by this
rocker type switch (9, Figure 32-8) when it is pressed toward the ON position.
Heated Mirror Switch (Optional)

If truck is equipped with the OPTIONAL Heated Mirror, it will be activated by this rocker type
switch (10, Figure 32-8) when it is pressed toward the ON position.

Page 32-14
10/04 OM3215
Blank (Not Used In This Application)

Reserved for future options (11, Figure 32-8).
Wheel Brake Lock Control
The Wheel Brake Lock control (12, Figure 32-8) should be used with engine running for dumping and loading operations only. The brake lock switch actuates the hydraulic brake system which locks the rear wheel service brakes
only. When pulling into shovel or dump area, stop the truck using the foot-operated service brake pedal. When
truck is completely stopped and in loading position, apply the brake lock by pressing the rocker switch toward the
ON symbol. To release, press the rocker switch toward the OFF symbol.
Use at shovel and dump only to hold truck in position.
Do not use this switch to stop truck, unless foot-operated treadle valve is inoperative. Use of this switch
applies rear service brakes with unmodulated pressure!
Do not use brake lock for parking. With engine stopped, hydraulic pressure will bleed down, allowing
brakes to release!
Parking Brake Control

The Parking Brake is spring applied and hydraulically released. It is designed to hold a stationary truck when the engine is shutdown and keyswitch is turned OFF. The truck must be
completely stopped before applying the parking brake, or damage may occur to parking
brake. To apply the parking brake, press the rocker switch (13, Figure 32-8) toward the ON
symbol. To release the parking brake, press the rocker switch toward the OFF symbol.
When the keyswitch is ON and Parking Brake switch is applied, the Parking Brake indicator
light (A3, Overhead Panel) will be illuminated.
Do not use the parking brake at shovel or dump. With keyswitch
ON and engine running, sudden shock caused by loading or dumping could cause the system's motion sensor to RELEASE the park
brake.
Tachometer
The tachometer (14, Figure 32-8) registers engine crankshaft speed in hundreds of revolutions per minute (RPM).
Governed RPM: Komatsu SDA16V160 or SSDA16V160 Engine:
Low Idle 750 RPM

High Idle, No load 1910 RPM
High Idle, Full Load 1900 RPM
OM3215 10/04

Page 32-15
Right Turn Signal Indicator

This light (15, Figure 32-8) illuminates to indicate the right turn signals are operating when
the turn signal lever on the steering column is moved upward. Moving the lever to its center
position will turn indicator OFF.
High Beam Indicator

The high beam indicator (16, Figure 32-8) when illuminated, indicates that the truck headlights are on HIGH beam. To switch headlights to HIGH beam, push the turn indicator lever
away from steering wheel. For LOW beam, pull lever toward the steering wheel.
Left Turn Signal Indicator

This light (17, Figure 32-8) illuminates to indicate the left turn signals are operating when the
turn signal lever on the steering column is moved downward. Moving the lever to its center
position will turn indicator OFF.
Speedometer / Payload Meter

The speedometer (18, Figure 32-8) indicates the truck speed in miles per hour (MPH), or with
OPTIONAL speedometer, it may indicate truck speed in kilometers per hour (KPH). The display also shows Payload Meter information. For more information, see Payload Meter in Index.
Voltmeter
The voltmeter (19, Figure 32-8) indicates the voltage of the 24V battery system. Normal indicated voltage at high RPM is 27 to 28 volts with batteries in fully charged condition. When
keyswitch (1) is ON and engine is NOT running, voltmeter indicates battery charge condition.
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge

The engine oil pressure gauge (20, Figure 32-8) indicates pressure in the engine lubrication
system in pounds per square inch (psi).
Komatsu SDA16V160 or SSDA16V160 Engine:
Normal operating pressure after engine warm up should be:
Idle - minimum: 20 psi (138 kPa), nominal: 25 psi (172 kPa)

Rated Speed - minimum: 40 psi (276 kPa), nominal: 65 psi (448 kPa)
Water Temperature Gauge
The water temperature gauge (21, Figure 32-8) indicates the temperature of the coolant in
the engine cooling system. The temperature range after engine warm-up and truck operating
under normal conditions should be: 185-207F (85-97C)
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge (22, Figure 32-8) indicates how much diesel fuel is in the fuel tank. Fuel tank
capacity is 1200 gallons (4543 liters).

Page 32-16
(23, Figure 32-8) (Not Used)
BLANK. Reserved for future Options.
Hourmeter
The hourmeter (24, Figure 32-8) registers the total number of hours the engine has been in operation.
BLANK. Not used in this truck application.
BLANK. Not used in this truck application.
Headlight Switch
The instrument panel lights, clearance lights, and the headlights are controlled by this three
position rocker type switch (27, Figure 32-8). OFF is selected by pressing the bottom of the
switch. Press the top of the switch until it reaches the first detent to select the panel, clearance, and tail lights only. Press the top of the switch again, until it reaches the second detent
to select headlights, as well as panel, clearance, and tail lights.
Panel Light Dimmer

The panel light dimmer control (28, Figure 32-8) is a rheostat which allows the operator to
vary the brightness of the instruments and panel lights.
Rotating knob to the full counterclockwise position turns panel lights ON to brightest
condition.
Rotating knob clockwise continually dims lights until ON position is reached at full
clockwise rotation.
Payload Meter Switch
The Payload Meter Switch (29, Figure 32-8) is a two-way, momentary switch. The top position is the Select position. The Select position is used to step through the different displays.
The lower position is the SET position. The SET position is used to set the Operator ID or
clear the load and total ton counters. Refer to Section 6, Optional Equipment, for a more
complete description of the Payload Meter System and its functions.
10/04 OM3215
OM3215 10/04

Page 32-17
FIGURE 32-9. OVERHEAD STATUS/WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS

Row/
Column
Indicator
Description
Indicator Color Wire Index
Row/
Column
Indicator
Description
Indicator Color Wire Index
B5
Wheel Motor Temperature
Red - 12FD1/722L
A1
Hydraulic Oil Temp.
Red - 12FD1/34TL
B1
Low Steering Pressure
Red - 12FD/33A
Low Accumulator Pressure
C5
Blower OFF
Red - 12FDZ/32B
C1
Red - 12F/33K
D5
Blank - For Future Use
Yellow - 12F/SP4
Red - 12FD/SP5D1
D1
Electric System Fault
Red - 12F/79V
E5
E1
Low Brake Pressure
Red - 12F/33L
A6
Yellow - 12M/SP6
B6
Red - 12M/SP7D2
C6
Yellow - 12MD/
SP7D1
D6
Yellow - 12MD/528
E6
Red - 12MD/SP5D2
#7
Hazard Lights Switch,

N.O.
11L/45L/45R
#8
Lamp Check Switch,

N.O. (Momentary)
712/528/33H/710
Low Hydraulic Tank Oil

Level
Red - 12F4/34LL
B2
Autolube Low Press.
Yellow - 12FD8/
68LLP
C2
Circuit Breaker Tripped
Yellow - 12FD/31CB
D2
Hydraulic Oil Filter
Yellow - 12FD/39
E2
Low Fuel
Yellow - 12F5/38
A3
Park Brake
Yellow - 12MD/52A
B3
Service Brake
Yellow - 12MD/44L
C3
Body Up
Yellow - 12MD6/63L
D3
Dynamic Retarding
Yellow - 12MD/44DL
E3
Stop Engine
Red - 12M/509MA
A2
A4
Yellow - 12MD/SP2
B4
Back-up Lights
Yellow - 12MD/47L
C4
5 Minute Idle Timer
Yellow - 12MD/23L1
D4
Retard Speed Control
Yellow - 12MD/31R
E4
Check Engine
Yellow - 12MD7/419
A5
Red - 12MD/528A
SWITCHES

Page 32-18
10/04 OM3215
INDICATOR LIGHT SYMBOLS

Indicator Lights which are AMBER (Yellow) in color alert the operator that the indicated truck function requires
some precaution when lighted.
Indicator Lights which are RED in color alert the operator that the indicated truck function requires immediate action by the operator. Safely stop the truck and shut down the engine. DO NOT OPERATE THE TRUCK WITH A
RED WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATED.
Refer to Figure 32-9 and the descriptions below for explanations of the symbols. Location of the symbols is described by rows (A-E) and columns (1 - 8).
For access to the indicator lights (and other overhead display components), remove the row of capscrews nearest
the driver and allow the bottom panel to swing down on its hinge.
A1. High Hydraulic Oil Temperature
This warning light indicates high oil temperature in the hydraulic tank. Continued operation
could damage components in the hydraulic system. Notify maintenance personnel immediately. The light turns on at 225 F (107 C).
B1. Low Steering Pressure

When the keyswitch is turned ON, the low steering pressure warning light will illuminate until
the steering system hydraulic pressure reaches 2100 psi (14.7 MPa). The warning horn will
also turn on, and both will remain on, until the accumulator has been charged.
During truck operation, the low steering pressure warning light and warning horn will turn
sound if steering system hydraulic pressure drops below 2100 psi (14.7 MPa).
If the light illuminates momentarily (flickers) while turning the steering wheel at low
truck speed and low engine RPM, this may be considered normal, and truck operation may continue.
If the indicator light illuminates at higher truck speed and high engine RPM, DO NOT OPERATE TRUCK.
If the low steering warning light continues to illuminate and the alarm
continues to sound, low steering pressure is indicated. The remaining
pressure in the accumulators allows the operator to control the truck
to a stop. Do not attempt further operation until the malfunction is
located and corrected.
C1. Low Accumulator Precharge Pressure

The low accumulator precharge warning light, if illuminated, indicates low nitrogen precharge
for the steering accumulator(s). To check for proper accumulator nitrogen precharge, engine
must be stopped and hydraulic system completely bled down; then turn keyswitch to RUN position. Warning light will NOT illuminate if system is properly charged. The warning light will flash
if the nitrogen precharge within the accumulator(s) is below 1100 45 psi (7585 310 kPa).
If low accumulator precharge warning light flashes, notify maintenance
personnel immediately. Do not attempt further operation until the accumulators have been recharged with nitrogen to 1400 psi (9653 kPa). Sufficient energy for emergency steering may not be available, if system is
not properly charged.
OM3215 10/04

Page 32-19
D1. Electric System Fault

The Electric System fault warning light will flash on and off when a malfunction occurs in the
electrical system. The warning horn will also sound intermittently. When the light illuminates,
propulsion will be dropped automatically. Reset by pushing override button. If fault repeats
again, stop truck and report problem to maintenance personnel.
NOTE: STATEX III records the number of faults/events. When a predetermined number of
faults/events are recorded within a given time frame, the operator will not be able to reset the
fault/event by using the override switch. If this occurs, refer to Section E for procedure to
download or clear fault information.
E1. Low Brake Pressure

This red indicator light indicates a malfunction within the hydraulic brake circuit. If this light
comes on and buzzer sounds, shut down truck operation and notify maintenance personnel.
NOTE: Adequate hydraulic fluid is stored to allow the operator to safely stop the truck.
A2. Low Hydraulic Tank Level
This warning light indicates the oil level in the hydraulic tank is below recommended level.
Damage to hydraulic pumps may occur if operation continues. Shut truck down and notify
maintenance personnel immediately.
B2. Low Automatic Lubrication System pressure

This amber indicator light indicates the automatic lubrication system is not providing adequate grease pressure. The problem may be caused by an empty grease reservoir, leaking
(damaged) hose, faulty injector or pump component. If this light turns on, notify maintenance
personnel.
C2. Circuit Breaker Tripped

This light will illuminate if any of the circuit breakers in the relay circuit control boards are
tripped. The relay circuit boards are located in the electrical control cabinet. Refer to Section
D for circuit breaker circuit information.
NOTE: Additional circuit breakers are in the operator cab behind the center console,
however tripping of these circuit breakers should not activate this light.
D2. Hydraulic Oil Filter Monitor
This light indicates a restriction in the high pressure filter assembly for either the
steering or hoist circuit. This light will come on before filters start to bypass. Notify
maintenance personnel at earliest opportunity after light comes on.
NOTE: The filter monitor warning light may also illuminate after the engine is initially started if
the oil is cold. If the light turns off after the oil is warmed, filter maintenance is not required.
E2. Low Fuel

This amber low fuel indicator will illuminate when the usable fuel remaining in the tank is approximately 25 gallons (95 liters). A warning buzzer will also sound.

Page 32-20
10/04 OM3215
A3. Parking Brake

This amber parking brake indicator will illuminate when the parking brake is applied. Do not attempt to drive truck with parking brake applied.
B3. Service Brake

This amber service brake indicator light will illuminate when the service brake pedal is applied
or when wheel brake lock or emergency brake is applied. Do not attempt to drive truck from
stopped position with service brakes applied.
C3. Body Up
This amber Body Up indicator, when illuminated, shows that the body is not completely down on the frame. The
truck should not be driven until body is down and light is off.
D3. Dynamic Retarding

This amber dynamic retarding indicator light illuminates when the retarder pedal is operated,
RSC (Retarder Speed Control) is activated, or the automatic overspeed retarding circuit is energized, indicating the dynamic retarding function of the truck is operating.
E3. Stop Engine

This RED engine monitor warning light will illuminate if a serious engine malfunction is detected in the electronic engine control system.
Electric propulsion to the wheelmotors will be discontinued.

Dynamic Retarding will still be available if needed to slow or stop the truck.
Stop the truck as quickly as possible in a safe area and apply parking
brake.
SHUT DOWN THE ENGINE IMMEDIATELY.
Additional engine damage is likely to occur if operation is continued.
Listed below are a few conditions that could cause the Stop Engine light to illuminate:
Low Oil Pressure - red warning light will illuminate, but engine does not shut down.
Low Coolant Level - red warning light will illuminate, but engine does not shut down.
Low Coolant Pressure - red warning light will illuminate, but engine does not shut down.
High Coolant Temperature - red warning light will illuminate, but engine does not shut down.
OM3215 10/04

Page 32-21
A4. Not Used

Not currently used. Reserved for future use or options.
B4. Manual Backup Lights

This amber indicator will illuminate when the manually operated Manual Backup switch (5, Figure 32-8, Instrument Panel) is turned ON.
C4. 5-Minute Idle Engine Shutdown Timer

When the Engine Shutdown Timer switch has been activated (2, Figure 32-8, Instrument
Panel), this indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the shutdown timing sequence has
started. Refer to Instrument panel for operation of this switch.
D4. Retard Speed Control Indicator

This amber light is illuminated when the RSC switch mounted on the console is pulled out to
the ON position.
E4. Check Engine

This amber Check Engine indicator will illuminate if a malfunction is detected by the electronic
engine control system. If this indicator illuminates, notify maintenance personnel as soon
as possible.
A5. Not Used


Page 32-22
B5. High Wheelmotor Temperature (Optional)
When this indicator is illuminated and alarm sounds, high wheel motor temperature is indicated. Stop truck, place Selector Switch in NEUTRAL and raise engine RPM to high idle for
several minutes to cool wheel motors. If indicator does not turn off, notify maintenance personnel.
C5. Motor Blower OFF

The motor blower warning light will flash on and off and an alarm will sound if a malfunction
occurs in the cooling air circuit for the alternator and motorized wheels. Stop the truck immediately and notify maintenance personnel if warning light illuminates.
Damage to electrical components may result without proper ventilation of rotating
equipment.
D5, E5, A6, B6, C6, D6, E6: NOT USED

Hazard Warning Lights

The hazard warning light switch (7) flashes all the turn signal lights. Pressing the bottom side
of the rocker switch (toward the triangle) activates these lights. Pressing the top side of the
rocker switch (toward the OFF symbol) turns these lights off.
Lamp Test Switch

The Lamp Test switch (8) is provided to allow the operator to test the indicator lamps prior to
starting the engine. To test the lamps, and the warning horn, turn the key switch (1, Figure
32-8) to the RUN position and press the bottom side of the rocker switch for the CHECK position. All lamps should illuminate, except those which are for optional equipment that is not
installed. The warning horn should also sound. Any lamp bulbs which do not illuminate
should be replaced before operating the truck. Releasing the spring-loaded switch will allow
the switch to return to the OFF position.
10/04 OM3215
OM3215 10/04

Page 32-23
OPERATOR COMFORT
OPERATOR SEAT
The operator's seat provides a fully adjustable cushioned ride for the driver's comfort and ease of operation.
Adjustment
The following adjustments must be made while sitting
in the seat.
1. Headrest: headrest (1, Figure 32-10) will move
up, down, fore, or aft by moving headrest to
desired position.
2. Armrests: rotate adjusting knob until armrest is in
desired position.
3. Backrest: Lift handle (3) to release and select
backrest angle: release control handle to set.
4. Seat Belt: Operator should always have seat belt
(4) buckled in place and properly adjusted whenever vehicle is in motion.
5. Seat Slope: Lift lever (5) and hold to adjust the
slope of the seat. Release lever to lock adjustment.
6. & 7 Air Lumbar Support: Each rocker switch (6
or 7) controls an air pillow. Switch (7) controls the
lower air pillow and switch (6) controls the upper
air pillow. To inflate, press on top of rocker switch
and hold for desired support, then release. To
deflate, press on bottom of rocker switch and hold
for desired support, then release. Adjust each pillow for desired support.
8. Seat Suspension: Press rocker switch (8) on top
to increase ride firmness. Press on lower part of
rocker switch to decrease ride firmness.
9. Fore/Aft Location of Seat: Lift lever (9) and hold.
Bend knees to move seat to a comfortable position: release control lever to lock adjustment.
12. Seat Height: Lift lever (12) and hold to adjust the
height of the seat. Release lever to lock adjustment.
Seat Removal
1. Remove capscrews (10, Figure 32-10) and hardware that secures the seat base to the riser.
Remove capscrews (11) that secures tether to
floor.
2. Remove seat assembly from cab to clean work
area for disassembly.
FIGURE 32-10. OPERATOR SEAT

ADJUSTMENT CONTROLS
1. Headrest
2. Armrest Adjustment
3. Backrest Adjustment
4. Seat Belt
5. Seat Slope Adjustment
6. Upper Air Pillow Lumbar Support
7. Lower Air Pillow Lumbar Support
8. Height Adjustment
9. Fore and Aft Adjustment
10. Mounting Capscrews and Hardware
11. Seat Tether Capscrew
12. Seat Height Adjustment

Page 32-24
Seat Installation
1. Mount seat assembly to seat riser. Install capscrews (10, Figure 32-10), lockwashers, flatwashers and nuts. Tighten capscrews to standard
torque.
2. Fasten tether straps to floor with capscrews (11),
flatwashers and lockwashers. Tighten capscrews
to standard torque.
10/04 OM3215
OM4043 10/04
Lubrication & Service - Section 40

Page 40-1
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE

Recommended Preventive Maintenance will contribute to the long life and dependability of the truck and
its components. The use of proper lubricants and the
performance of checks and adjustments at the recommended intervals is most important.
Lubrication requirements are referenced to the lube
key found in the Truck Lubrication Specifications
Chart (page 4-3). For detailed service requirements
for specific components, refer to the Shop manual
section for that component (i.e. Section H for Suspensions, Section L for Hydraulic System, etc.).
Refer to manufacturer's service manual when servicing any components of the General Electric System.
Refer to engine manufacturer's service manual when
servicing the engine or any of its components.
The service intervals presented here are in hours of
operation. These intervals are recommended in
lieu of an oil analysis program which may determine different intervals. However, if the truck is
being operated under extreme conditions, some or
all, of the intervals may need to be shortened and the
service performed more frequently.
The 830E Truck is equipped with a Lincoln Automatic
Lubrication System. The initial setup for this system
provides for nominal amounts of lubricant to be delivered to each serviced point. The lubrication injectors
can be adjusted to vary the amount of lubricant delivered. In addition, the timer for lubrication intervals is
normally adjustable. For adjustments to these
devices, consult the Lincoln Automatic Lubrication
System later in this section of the manual.
830E SERVICE CAPACITIES

Liters
U.S.
Gallons
Komatsu SSDA16V160 or
SDA16V160 Engines
280
74
Cooling System:
Komatsu SSDA16V160 or
SDA16V160 Engines Engine
568
150
947
901
250
238
Wheel Motor Gear Box

(each side)
39.7
10.5
Fuel Tank (Diesel Fuel Only)
4542
1200
Crankcase:
Hydraulic System:
Hydraulic Tank
Refer to Hydraulic Tank Service
HYDRAULIC TANK SERVICE

There are two sight gauges on the side of the
hydraulic tank. With engine stopped, keyswitch OFF,
hydraulic system bled down and body down, oil
should be visible in the top sight gauge. If hydraulic
oil is not visible in the top sight gauge, follow Adding
Oil instructions below.
Adding Oil
Keep the system open to the atmosphere only as
long as absolutely necessary to lessen chances of
system contamination.
Service the tank with clean Type C-4 hydraulic oil
only. All oil being put into the hydraulic tank should
be filtered through 3 micron filters.
1. With engine stopped, keyswitch OFF, hydraulic
system bled down and body down, check to see
that hydraulic oil is visible in the top sight
gauge.
2. If hydraulic oil is not visible in the top sight
gauge, remove the tank fill cap and add clean,
filtered C-4 hydraulic oil (Lubrication Chart,
Lube Key B) until oil is visible in the top sight
gauge.
3. Replace fill cap.
4. Start engine. Raise and lower the dump body
three times.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 until oil is maintained
in the top sight gauge with engine stopped,
body down, and hydraulic system bled down.

Page 40-2
10/04 OM4043
COOLANT LEVEL CHECK

Inspect the coolant sight gauge. If coolant cannot be
seen in the sight gauge, it is necessary to add coolant to the system before truck operation. Refer to the
procedure below for the proper filling procedure.
RADIATOR FILLING PROCEDURE
Cooling System is pressurized due to thermal

expansion of coolant. DO NOT remove radiator
cap while engine and coolant are hot. Severe
burns may result.
1. With engine and coolant at ambient temperature, remove radiator cap.
Note: If coolant is added using the Wiggins quick fill
system, the radiator cap MUST be removed prior to
adding coolant.
2. Fill radiator with proper coolant mixture (as
specified by the engine manufacturer) until
coolant is visible in the sight gauge.
3. Install radiator cap.
4. Run engine for 5 minutes, check coolant level.
5. If coolant is not visible in the sight gauge,
repeat steps 1 through 4. Any excess coolant
will be discharged through the vent hose after
the engine reaches normal operating temperature.
Engine coolant must always be visible in the sight
gauge before truck operation.
RESERVE ENGINE OIL SYSTEM

(Optional)
The reserve oil tank for the engine is designed to add
more oil capacity to the engine to reduce the frequent
servicing of the engine oil. The engine oil level must
still be checked every shift using the dipstick. If
engine oil level is not correct, check for proper operation of reserve oil system. Never add oil to engine
unless it has been drained.
If the engine oil has been drained from the oil pan,
the new oil must be added to the engine oil pan
before starting. DO NOT use the oil in the reserve
tank to fill an empty engine with oil. After an oil
change, both engine and reserve tank must be full of
oil before starting the engine.
Reserve Oil Tank Filling Procedure (Remote fill)
1. Connect the pressure supply hose from the
new oil supply to the quick coupler on the truck.
Open valve on supply hose to apply pressure.
2. Pull out on switch (2) to turn the system ON.
3. Push start switch (3). The Valve Open light (5)
should illuminate and the filling process will
begin.
4. When tank is full, the Valve Open light will turn
OFF and the FULL light (4) will illuminate.
5. Close the oil supply valve in the fill hose.
6. Press and hold start switch (3) for several seconds.
7. Disconnect the new oil supply hose.
8. Push switch (2) in to turn system power OFF.
COOLING SYSTEM
ANTI-FREEZE RECOMMENDATIONS
(Ethylene Glycol Permanent Type Anti-Freeze)
Percentage of
Anti-Freeze
Protection To:
10
+ 23 F
5 C
20
+ 16 F
- 9 C
25
+ 11 F
- 11 C
30
+ 4 F
- 16 C
35
- 3 F
- 19 C
40
- 12 F
- 24 C
45
- 23 F
- 30 C
50
- 34 F
- 36 C
55
- 48 F
- 44 C
60
- 62 F
- 52 C
FIGURE 40-1. CONTROL BOX

1. Remote Control Box
2. System Switch
3. Start Switch
4. Full Light
5. Valve Open Light

Page 40-3
LUBRICATION CHART
OM4043 10/04

Page 40-4
10/04 OM4043
10 HOUR (DAILY) INSPECTION

Prior to each operating shift, a walk around inspection should be performed. Check the truck for general
condition. Look for evidence of hydraulic leaks;
check all lights and mirrors for clean and unbroken
lenses; check operator's cab for clean and unbroken
glass; check frame, sheet metal and body for cracks.
Notify the proper maintenance authority if any discrepancies are found. Give particular attention to the
following:
10 HOUR LUBRICATION AND

MAINTENANCE CHECKS
1. FAN DRIVE AND TURBOCHARGERS - Check
for leaks, vibration or unusual noise. Check
alternator and fan belts for proper tension, condition and for alignment.
2. RADIATOR - Check coolant level and fill with
proper mixture as shown in Cooling System
Recommendation Chart. Refer to Engine Manual for proper coolant additives.
3. ENGINE - Check oil level on dipstick. Refer to
engine manufacturer's shop manual for oil recommendations. (Lube Key A).
Inspect exhaust piping for security.
Centinel - Check reservoir oil level
Eliminator Filter - Check operating indicator
NOTE: If truck is equipped with a reserve engine oil
tank, the oil should be visible in the center (middle)
sight gauge. If not, add oil to reserve tank until oil is
visible in top sight gauge. Also, with engine running,
check operation of the LED indicator light. See below
for description of LED Light Signals.
LED Light Signals:
Steady - Pump 1 is withdrawing oil from the
engine sump and bringing down the oil level.
Regular Pulsing - Pump 2 is returning oil to the
engine sump and raising the oil level.
Irregular Pulsing - Oil is at the correct running
level.
4. FUEL FILTERS (Fuel Separators) - Drain water

from bottom of each filter housing.
5. HYDRAULIC TANK - Check oil level in tank,
add oil if necessary. Refer to Hydraulic Tank
Service. Oil should be visible in top sight glass.
- DO NOT OVERFILL. Lube Key B.
Truck Serial Number ________________________

Site Unit Number ____________________________
Date: __________ Hour Meter _________________
Name of Service Person ______________________
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
OM4043 10/04

Page 40-5
10 HOUR (DAILY) INSPECTION (continued)

6. AIR CLEANERS - Check air cleaner vacuum
gauges in operator cab. The air cleaner(s)
should be serviced if the gauge(s) shows the
following maximum restriction:
Komatsu SSDA16V160 or SDA16V160 Engine:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 in. of H2O vacuum.
Refer to the shop manual, Section C for servicing instructions for the air cleaner elements. Empty air cleaner dust caps.
NOTE: After service, push the reset button on face of
gauge to allow the gauge to return to zero.
7. WHEELS AND TIRES a. Inspect tires for proper inflation and wear.
b. Inspect for debris embedded in cuts or tread.
c. Inspect for damaged, loose, or missing
wheel mounting nuts/studs.
8. CAB AIR FILTER (NOT SHOWN) - Under normal operating conditions, clean every 250
hours. In extremely dusty conditions, service as
frequently as required. Clean filter element with
mild soap and water, rinse completely clean
and air dry with maximum of 40 psi (275 kPa).
Reinstall filter.
9. AUTOMATIC LUBE SYSTEM a. Check grease reservoir; fill as required. Lube
Key D.
b. When filling reservoir, check grease filter
indicator. Clean or replace grease filter if
indicator detects a problem.
c. Inspect system and check for proper operation. Be certain the following important areas
are receiving adequate amounts of grease.
Lube Key D.
Steering Linkage
Final Drive Pivot Pin
Rear Hydrair Suspension Pin Joints Upper & Lower
Body Hinge Pins
Hoist Cylinders Pins - Upper & Lower
Anti-sway Bar - Both Ends
10. COOLING AIR DUCTWORK - Inspect ductwork from blower to rear drive case to be certain that ductwork is secure and undamaged
and there are no cooling air restrictions.
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS

Page 40-6
10/04 OM4043
50 HOUR LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS

Maintenance for every 10 hours/shift Lubrication and
Maintenance Checks should also be carried out at
this time.

Site Unit Number ____________________________
Date: __________ Hour Meter _________________
COMMENTS
1. * FUEL FILTERS - Change the Fuel Filters,

(Fuel Separators).
Refer to engine manufacturer's maintenance
manual for fuel filter replacement instructions.
2. * HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FILTERS - Replace filter elements only, after the initial 50, 100, and
250 hours of operation; then at each 500 hours
of operation thereafter.
3. * FAN DRIVE ASSEMBLY - Check torque for
the six fan mounting capscrews: 175 ft. lbs.
(237 N.m).
* These checks are required only after the initial

hours of operation (such as: the commissioning of
a new truck, or after a new or rebuilt component
installation).
CHECKED
INITIALS
OM4043 10/04

Page 40-7

Maintenance for every 10 & 50 hour Lubrication and
Maintenance Checks should also be carried out at
this time.

Site Unit Number ____________________________
Date: __________ Hour Meter _________________
COMMENTS
1. * HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FILTERS - Replace filter elements only, after the initial 100 and 250
hours of operation; then at each 500 hours of
operation thereafter.
* These checks are required only after the initial

100 hours of operation (such as: the commissioning of a new truck, or after a new or rebuilt component installation).
CHECKED
INITIALS

Page 40-8
10/04 OM4043

Maintenance requirements for the 10 hour Lubrication and Maintenance Checks should also be carried
out at this time.
NOTE: Lube Key references are to the Lubrication
Specification Chart.
1. ENGINE - Refer to engine manufacturers
Operation & Maintenance manual for complete specifications regarding engine lube oil
specifications.
NOTE: If engine is equipped with the *CENTINEL
oil system and/or the ELIMINATOR filter system,
engine oil and filter change intervals are extended
beyond 250 hours. Refer to Cummins Operation &
Maintenance manual for specific oil & filter change
intervals.
a. Change engine oil. Lube Key A.
b. Replace engine oil filters.
NOTE: When installing spin-on filter elements, follow
the instructions as specified by the filter
manufacturer. The tightening instructions are
normally printed on the outside of the filter. Do not
use a wrench or strap to tighten filter elements.
c. If truck is equipped with a Reserve Engine
Oil Tank, change the reserve tank oil filter.
d. Check the fan belt tension. Refer to engine
Operation & Maintenance manual for specific fan belt adjustment instructions.
e. Eliminator Filter - Check pressure drop.
2. FUEL FILTERS - Change the Fuel Filters (Fuel
Separators). Refer to engine Operation & Maintenance manual for specific fuel filter replacement instructions.
3. HYDRAULIC PUMP DRIVESHAFT & UJOINTS - Add one or two applications of grease
to each grease fitting. Check that each bearing
of the Cross & Bearing assembly is receiving
grease. Non-moly grease only.
4. FUEL TANK - Drain water and sediment from
fuel tank drain cock.
5. FRONT WHEELS - Check oil level. Lube key
E.
* The Centinel system is a duty-cycle-dependent
lubrication management system whereby oil is
blended with the fuel and burned and an extension of
oil change intervals can occur.
(CONTINUED NEXT PAGE)

Site Unit Number ____________________________
Date: __________ Hour Meter _________________
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
OM4043 10/04
6. COOLING SYSTEM a. Check cooling system for proper coolant
mixture. Add coolant mixture as required.
b. COOLANT FILTERS - Change coolant filters. Refer to engine manufacturer's maintenance manual for coolant filter replacement
instructions and proper coolant mixture
instructions.
7. STEERING LINKAGE - Check torque on pin
retaining nuts (steering linkage), 525 ft. lbs.
(712 N.m) torque. Check torque on tie rod
clamp retaining capscrews, 310 ft. lbs. (420
N.m) torque. Inspect all lube points to be certain
all are receiving adequate grease. Look for broken lines, or signs of inoperative injectors.
8. CAB AIR FILTER (NOT SHOWN) - Under normal operating conditions, clean every 250
hours. In extremely dusty conditions, service as
frequently as required. Clean filter element with
mild soap and water, rinse completely clean
and air dry with maximum of 40 psi (275 kPa).
Reinstall filter.
9. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FILTERS - Replace filter elements only after the initial 250 hours of
operation; then at each 500 hours of operation
thereafter. Check oil level. Add oil as necessary. Lube Key B.
10. MOTORIZED WHEEL GEAR CASE - Refer to
the G.E. Planned Maintenance Manual and
specific motorized wheel shop manual.
Check for correct oil level. Lube key C.
11. WHEEL MOTOR BLOWER - Grease motor
blower shaft bearings. Lube key D.
12. G.E. PREFILTER BLOWER - Add one to two
applications of grease to the grease fitting. Lube
key D.
13. BATTERIES (NOT SHOWN) - Check electrolyte
level and add water if necessary.
14. BODY-UP SWITCH (NOT SHOWN) - Clean
sensing area of any dirt accumulation.
* These checks are required only after the first 250
hours of operation (such as: the commissioning of
a new truck, or after a new or rebuilt component
installation), check:

Page 40-9
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS

Page 40-10
10/04 OM4043

Maintenance requirements for every 10, 50, 100, &
250 hour Lubrication and Maintenance Checks
should also be carried out at this time.

Site Unit Number ____________________________
Date: __________ Hour Meter _________________

1. FINAL DRIVE CASE BREATHERS - Remove

breather elements for motorized wheels and
clean or replace elements.
2. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FILTERS - Replace
tank breathers & high pressure filter elements.
Check oil level, add as required. Lube Key B.
3. HYDRAIR SUSPENSION - Check for proper
piston extension (front and rear).
4. THROTTLE AND BRAKE PEDAL (NOT
SHOWN) - Lubricate treadle roller and hinge
pins with lubricating oil. Lift boot from mounting
plate and apply a few drops of lubricating oil
between mounting plate and plunger.
5. HOIST LIMIT SWITCH (NOT SHOWN) - Check
operation. Clean and adjust as necessary.
6. HOIST ACTUATOR LINKAGE (NOT SHOWN)
- Check operation. Clean, lubricate, and adjust
as necessary.
7. PARKING BRAKE (NOT SHOWN) - Refer to
the Shop Manual, Section "J", PARKING
BRAKE MAINTENANCE, and perform the recommended inspection.
8. RESERVE ENGINE OIL SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)
a. Check electrical system connections for
tightness, corrosion and physical damage.
Check battery, oil pressure switch, junction
boxes, remote control fill box and circuit
breakers.
b. Examine all electrical cables over their entire
length for possible damage.
c. Examine all hoses, including those on
reserve tank and ones leading to and from
engine, for leaks, cracks or damage. Check
all fittings for tightness, leakage or damage.
9. WHEEL MOTOR OIL (Initial 500 hours only)
- Change or filter wheel motor gear oil only after
initial 500 hours or operation. Wheel motor gear
oil must be filtered or changed every 2500
hours of operation thereafter.
10. FRONT WHEELS - Check front wheel bearing
preload 500 hours after truck commissioning
(and at 500 hours after each rebuild) and every
5000 hours there after. Refer to Section G in
the shop manual for bearing preload adjustment
procedures.
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
OM4043 10/04

Page 40-11
500 HOUR LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS (continued)

11. ACCUMULATOR PRECHARGE - Check all
steering and brake system accumulator precharge pressures. Refer to shop manual for
details.
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
1000 HOURS LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS

Maintenance for every 10, 250, & 500 hour Lubrication and Maintenance Checks should be performed
at this time.

Site Unit Number ____________________________
Date: __________ Hour Meter _________________
1. HYDRAULIC TANK - Drain hydraulic oil and

clean inlet strainer. Refill tank with oil, approximate capacity 238 gal. (901 l). Use Lube Key
B.
NOTE: Oil change interval can be extended to 2,500
hours if oil is sampled at regular intervals and no
abnormalities are detected.
2. RADIATOR - Clean cooling system with a quality cleaning compound. Flush with water. Refill
system with anti-freeze and water solution.
Check Cooling System Recommendation Chart
for correct mixture. Refer to Engine manufacture's manual for correct additive mixture.
3. FUEL TANK - Remove breather and clean in
solvent. Dry with air pressure and reinstall.
4. OPERATOR'S SEAT - Apply grease to slide
rails. Use Lube Key D.
5. AUTOMATIC BRAKE APPLICATION - Ensure
brakes are automatically applied when brake
pressure decreases below specified limit. Refer
to the shop manual for Brake Check-out procedure.
6. FRONT ENGINE MOUNT TRUNION - Add one
or two applications of grease at fitting. Lube key
D.
7. AUTOMATIC LUBE SYSTEM PUMP - Check
pump housing oil level. Refill to bottom of level
plug with SAE 10W-30 motor oil.
8. ELIMINATOR FILTER - Clean and check centrifuge. Refer to engine manufactures Operation
& Maintenance Manual. (Service interval is
dependent on duty cycle, oil quality, etc.)
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS

Page 40-12
2500 HOUR MAIN1TENANCE CHECKS

Maintenance for every 10, 250, & 500 hour Lubrication and Maintenance Checks should be performed
at this time.
10/04 OM4043
Site Unit Number ____________________________
Date: __________ Hour Meter _________________
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
1. WHEEL MOTOR GEAR OIL - Wheel motor

gear oil must be filtered or replaced every 2500
hours of operation. Refer to G.E. Motorized
Wheel Service & Maintenance manual.
2. FRONT WHEELS - Drain oil and refill to proper
level. Lube key E.

Site Unit Number ____________________________
5000 HOUR MAINTENANCE CHECKS

Maintenance for every 10, 250, 500, 1,000 & 2,500
hour Lubrication and Maintenance Checks should be
performed at this time.
1. FRONT WHEELS - Drain oil and completely
disassemble and check all parts for wear or
damage. Refer to Section G of the service
manual for disassembly and assembly procedures. Refill with oil. Check the oil level at the oil
level plug on wheel hub. Lube key C. Check
bearing preload at the first 500 hours after each
rebuild.
Date: __________ Hour Meter _________________

COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
2. AIR CLEANERS - Clean the Donaclone Tubes

in the pre-cleaner section of the air filter. Use
low pressure cold water or low pressure air to
clean tubes. Refer to Shop Manual, Section "C".
NOTE: Do not use a hot pressure washer or high
pressure air to clean tubes, hot water/high pressure
causes pre-cleaner tubes to distort.

Site Unit Number ____________________________
10,000 HOUR MAINTENANCE CHECKS

Maintenance for every 10, 250, 500, 1,000, 2,500 &
5000 hour Lubrication and Maintenance Checks
should be performed at this time.
1. WHEEL MOTORS - Clean the area around the
grease ports to prevent dirt or other contaminates from entering. Remove the six grease
port plugs on each wheel motor. Grease the
inboard and outboard wheel hub bearings with
one 14 oz. cartridge per each grease port.
Date: __________ Hour Meter _________________

COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
OM4203
Automatic Lubrication System - Section 42

42-1
AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Lincoln Automatic Lubrication System is a pressurized lubricant delivery system which delivers a controlled amount of lubricant to designated lube points.
The system is controlled by an electronic timer which
signals a solenoid valve to operate a hydraulic motor
powered grease pump. Hydraulic oil for pump operation is supplied by the truck steering circuit.
Grease output is proportional to the hydraulic motor
input flow. A pump control manifold, mounted on top of
the hydraulic motor, controls input flow and pressure. A
24VDC Solenoid mounted on the manifold turns the
pump on and off.
The pump is driven by the rotary motion of the hydraulic motor, which is then converted to reciprocating
motion through an eccentric crank mechanism. The
reciprocating action causes the pump cylinder to move
up and down. The pump is a positive displacement,
double-acting type as grease output occurs on both the
up and the down stroke
During the down stroke, the pump cylinder is extended

into the grease. Through the combination of shovel
action and vacuum generated in the pump cylinder
chamber, the grease is forced into the pump cylinder.
Simultaneously, grease is discharged through the outlet of the pump. The volume of grease during intake is
twice the amount of grease output during one cycle.
During the upstroke, the inlet check valve closes, and
one half the grease taken in during the previous stroke
is transferred through the outlet check and discharged
to the outlet port.
Over-pressurizing of the system, modifying parts,

using incompatible chemicals and fluids, or using
worn or damaged parts, may result in equipment
damage and/or serious personal injury.
DO NOT exceed the stated maximum working pressure of the pump, or of the lowest
rated component in the system.
Do not alter or modify any part of this system unless approved by factory authorization.
Do not attempt to repair or disassemble the

equipment while the system is pressurized.
Make sure all fluid connections are securely

tightened before using this equipment.
Always read and follow the fluid manufacturer's recommendations regarding fluid
compatibility, and the use of protective
clothing and equipment.
Check all equipment regularly and repair, or

replace, worn or damaged parts immediately.
FIGURE 42-1. PUMP & RESERVOIR COMPONENTS

7. Vent Valve
1. Hose From Filter
8. Pressure Gauge
2. Outlet to Injectors
9. Pump Assembly
3. Hydraulic Motor
10. 1Flow Control Valve
4. Pressure Reducing
11. Pressure Switch
Valve
12. Grease Reservoir
5. Solenoid Valve
13. Vent Hose
6. Test Switch
This equipment generates very high grease pressure. Extreme caution should be used when operating this equipment as material leaks from loose
or ruptured components can inject fluid through
the skin and into the body causing serious bodily
injury including possible need for amputation. Adequate protection is recommended to prevent
splashing of material onto the skin or into the eyes.
If any fluid appears to penetrate the skin, get emergency medical care immediately! Do not treat as a
simple cut. Tell attending physician exactly what
fluid was injected.
Section 42 - Automatic Lubrication System

42-2
OM4203
FIGURE 42-2. AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

NOTE: The above illustration shows the standard location for the lube pump and reservoir
(right platform). This assembly may be located on the left platform on some models.
1. L.H. Suspension, Bottom Bearing
2. L.H. Hoist Cylinder, Top Bearing
3. L.H. Hoist Cylinder, Bottom Bearing
4. L.H. Suspension, Top Bearing
5. L.H. Body Pivot Pin
6. R.H. Body Pivot Pin
7. R.H. Suspension, Top Bearing
8. Grease Supply From Pump
9. R.H. Suspension, Bottom Bearing
10. R.H. Hoist Cylinder, Top Bearing
11. R.H. Hoist Cylinder, Bottom Bearing
12. Rear Axle Pivot Pin
13. L.H. Anti-Sway Bar Bearing

14. R.H. Anti-Sway Bar Bearing
15. Truck Frame
16. Vent Hose
17. Test Switch
18. Pressure Switch, N.O., 2500 psi (17 237 kPa)
19. Grease Pump
20. Vent Valve
21. Filter
22. Grease Supply to Injectors
23. Injectors
24. Pressure Switch, N.O., 2000 psi (13 790 kPa)
OM4203
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Filter
A filter assembly (21, Figure 42-2) mounted on the
grease reservoir filters the grease prior to refilling the
reservoir from the shop supply. A bypass indicator
alerts service personnel when the filter requires
replacement.
Hydraulic Motor and Pump
The rotary hydraulic pump (3 & 9, Figure 42-1) is a fully
hydraulically operated grease pump. An integrated
pump control manifold is incorporated with the motor to
control input flow and pressure.
Note: The pump crankcase oil level must be
maintained to the level of the pipe plug port. If
necessary, refill with 10W-30 motor oil.
Hydraulic oil supply inlet pressure must not

exceed 3000 psi (20 685 kPa). Exceeding the rated
pressure may result in damage to the system components and personal injury.
Grease Reservoir
The reservoir (12, Figure 42-1) has an approximate
capacity of 90 lbs. (41 kg) of grease. When the grease
supply is replenished by filling the system at the service center, the grease is passed through the filter to
remove contaminants before it flows into the reservoir.
Pressure Reducing Valve
The pressure reducing valve (4, Figure 42-1), located
on the manifold reduces the hydraulic supply pressure
(from the truck steering circuit) to a suitable operating
pressure, [325-350 psi (2 240-2 415 kPa)] for the
hydraulic motor used to drive the lubricant pump.
Flow Control Valve
The flow control valve (10, Figure 42-1) mounted on
the manifold, controls the amount of oil flow to the
hydraulic motor. The flow control valve has been factory adjusted and the setting should not be disturbed.
Solenoid Valve
The solenoid valve (5, Figure 42-1), when energized,
allows oil to flow to the hydraulic motor.

42-3
Vent Valve
With the vent valve (7, Figure 42-1) closed, the pump
continues to operate until maximum grease pressure is
achieved. As this occurs, the vent valve opens and
allows the grease pressure to drop to 0, so the injectors
can recharge for their next output cycle.
Lubrication Cycle Timer
The solid state lubrication cycle timer (1, Figure 42-4)
provides a 24 VDC timed-interval signal to energize the
solenoid valve (5, Figure 42-1), providing oil flow to
operate the grease pump motor. This timer is mounted
in the Electrical Interface Cabinet.
Delay Timer
The delay timer (7, Figure 42-4), located in the Electrical Interface Cabinet, provides a one minute delay in
the low pressure warning lamp circuit to allow a normally operating system to attain full grease system
pressure without activating the warning lamp. If the
system fails to reach 2000 psi (13 789 kPa) within this
time period, the timer will apply 24VDC to several
relays which will illuminate the low pressure warning
lamp in the overhead display. An external 604K ohm
resistor determines the delay period.
Pump Cutoff Pressure Switch (N.O. 2500 psi [17
237 kPa])
This pressure switch (18, Figure 42-2) de-energizes
the pump solenoid relay when the grease line pressure
reaches the switch pressure setting, turning off the
motor and pump.
Grease Pressure Failure Switch (N.O. 2000 psi [13
789 kPa])
This pressure switch (24, Figure 42-2) monitors grease
pressure in the injector bank on the rear axle housing.
If the proper pressure is not sensed within 60 seconds
(switch contacts do not close), several relays energize,
actuating a warning lamp circuit to notify the operator a
problem exists in the lube system.
Pressure Gauge
The pressure gauge (8, Figure 42-1) monitors hydraulic oil pressure to the inlet of the hydraulic motor.
Injectors
Each injector (23, Figure 42-2) delivers a controlled
amount of pressurized lubricant to a designated lube
point. Refer to Figure 42-2 for locations.

42-4
OM4203
SYSTEM OPERATION
Normal Operation:
1. During truck operation, the lubrication cycle timer
(1, Figure 42-4) will energize the system at a preset time interval.
2. The timer provides 24 VDC through the normally
closed relay, RB6-K1 (12) used to energize the
pump solenoid valve (5), allowing hydraulic oil
provided by the truck steering pump circuit to flow
to the pump motor and initiate a pumping cycle.
3. The hydraulic oil pressure from the steering circuit
is reduced to 325 to 350 psi (2 240 to 2 413 kPa)
by the pressure reducing valve (4, Figure 42-3)
before entering the motor. In addition, the amount
of oil supplied to the pump is limited by the flow
control valve (6). Pump pressure can be read
using the gauge (5) mounted on the manifold.
4. With oil flowing into the hydraulic motor, the
grease pump will operate, pumping grease from
the reservoir to the injectors (13), through a check
valve (10) and to the vent valve (11).
5. During this period, the injectors will meter the

appropriate amount of grease to each lubrication
point.
6. When grease pressure reaches the pressure
switch (3, Figure 42-4) setting, the switch contacts
will close and energize the relay RB6-K1, removing power from the hydraulic motor/pump solenoid and the pump will stop. The relay will remain
energized until grease pressure drops and the
pressure switch opens again or until the timer
turns off.
7. After the pump solenoid valve is de-energized,
hydraulic pressure in the manifold drops and the
vent valve (11, Figure 42-3) will open, releasing
grease pressure in the lines to the injector banks.
When this occurs, the injectors are then able to
recharge for the next lubrication cycle.
8. The system will remain at rest until the lubrication
cycle timer turns on and initiates a new grease
cycle.
FIGURE 42-3. HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC

1. Hydraulic Oil Return
2. Hydraulic Oil Supply
3. Pump Solenoid Valve
4. Pressure Reducing Valve
5. Motor Pressure Gauge
6. Flow Control Valve

7. Hydraulic Motor
8. Grease Pump
9. Pressure Switch (N.O.)
10. Check Valve
11. Vent Valve

12. Orifice
13. Injector Bank
OM4203

42-5
Pressure Failure Detection Circuits:

1. When the lubrication cycle is initiated, 24VDC
flows through relay RB6-K4 (8, Figure 42-4) N.C.
contacts to a 1 minute delay timer (7).
2. If the system is operating normally, grease pressure at the rear axle injector bank will rise to pressure switch (9) setting of 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) and
energize relay RB6-K4 (7), removing 24VDC from
the delay timer.
3. If a problem occurs and the system is not able to
attain 2000 psi (13.8 MPa), the delay timer (7) will
energize relay RB6-K2 (10) after 60 seconds,

turning on the Low Lube System Pressure warning lamp on the overhead display. After RB6-K2
relay energizes, it will energize relay RB6-K6 (6).
4. Once RB6-K6 is energized, it will latch and
remain energized as long as the keyswitch is ON.
In addition, RB6-K2 will also remain energized
and the Low Lube Pressure Warning lamp will
remain on to notify the operator a problem exists
and the system requires service.
FIGURE 42-4. ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC

1. Lubrication Cycle Timer
2. Circuit Breaker 33 (Power Distribution Module in Cab)
3. Circuit Breaker 35 (Power Distribution Module in Cab)
4. Pressure Switch: N.O.
5. Grease Pump Solenoid Valve
6. Relay K6 (On Relay Board RB6)
7. Time Delay Module

9. Pressure Switch; N.O. (Rear Axle Injector Bank)
11. Low Grease Pressure Warning Lamp
(On Overhead Display Panel)
13. Test Switch

42-6
OM4203
INJECTOR OPERATION
STAGE 1.
The injector piston (2) is in its normal or
rest position. The discharge chamber
(3) is filled with lubricant from the previous cycle. Under the pressure of incoming lubricant (6), the slide valve (5) is
about to open the passage (4) leading
to the measuring chamber (1) above
the injector piston (2).
STAGE 2.
When the slide valve (5) uncovers the
passage (4), lubricant (6) is admitted to
the measuring chamber (1) above the
injector piston (2) which forces lubricant
from the discharge chamber (3) through
the outlet port (7) to the bearing.
STAGE 3.
As the injector piston (2) completes its
stroke, it pushes the slide valve (5) past
the passage (4), cutting off further admission of lubricant (6) to the passage
(4) and measuring chamber (1). The
injector piston (2) and slide valve (5)
remain in this position until lubricant
pressure in the supply line (6) is vented.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
STAGE 4.
After venting, the injector spring expands, causing the slide valve (5) to
move, so that the passage (4) and discharge chamber (3) are connected by a
valve port (8). Further expansion of the
spring causes the piston to move upward, forcing the lubricant in the measuring chamber (1) through the
passage (4) and valve port (8) to refill
the discharge chamber (3).
Injector is now ready for the next cycle.
LUBRICANT REQUIRED FOR

SYSTEM
Grease requirements will depend
on ambient temperatures encountered during truck operation:
Above 90F (32C) - Use

NLGI No. 2 multipurpose
grease (MPG).
-25 to 90F (-32 to 32C) Use NLGI No. 1 multipurpose grease (MPG).
Below -25F (-32C) - Refer

to local supplier for extreme
cold weather lubricant
requirements.
OM4203

42-7
System Priming
The system must be full of grease and free of air pockets to function properly. After maintenance, if the primary or secondary lubrication lines were replaced, it
will be necessary to reprime the system to eject all
entrapped air.
1. Fill lube reservoir with lubricant, if necessary.
2. To purge air from the main supply line, remove
the main supply line at the Lincoln Lube canister
and connect an external grease supply to the line.
3. Remove plugs from each injector group in
sequence (right front, left front, and rear axle).
4. Using the external grease source, pump grease
until grease appears at the group of injectors and
re-install the pipe plug. Repeat for remaining
injector groups.
5. Remove the caps from each injector and connect
an external grease supply to the zerk on the injector and pump until grease appears at the far end
of the individual grease hose or the joint being
greased.
Filter Assembly
The filter assembly element (5, Figure 42-5) should be
replaced if the bypass indicator (2) shows excessive
element restriction.
FIGURE 42-5. FILTER ASSEMBLY

1. Housing
2. Bypass Indicator
3. O-Ring
4. Backup Ring
5. Element
6. Spring
7. Bowl
8. O-Ring
9. Plug

42-8
OM4203
LUBRICANT PUMP
Pump Housing Oil Level
The pump housing must be filled to the proper level
with SAE 10W-30 motor oil. Oil level should be
checked at 1000 hour intervals. To add oil, remove
pipe plug (4, Figure 42-6) and fill housing to bottom of
plug hole.
Pump Pressure Control
High pressure hydraulic fluid from the truck steering
system is reduced to 325 to 350 psi (2 240 to 2 413
kPa) by the pressure reducing valve located on the
manifold on top of the pump motor. This pressure can
be read on the gauge installed on the manifold and
should be checked occasionally to verify pressure is
within the above limits.
Pressure Control Valve Adjustment
1. With the truck engine running, activate the lube
system manual test switch (2, Figure 42-6) to start
the hydraulic motor and pump.
2. Loosen the locknut on the pressure control (1,
Figure 42-6) by turning the nut counterclockwise.
3. Turn the valve stem counterclockwise until it no
longer turns. (The valve stem will unscrew until it
reaches the stop - it will not come off.)
Note: This is the minimum pressure setting, which is
about 170 psi (1 172 kPa).
4. With the pump stalled against pressure, turn the
pressure control valve stem clockwise until 325 to
350 psi (2 240 to 2 413 kPa) is attained on the
manifold pressure gauge (2).
5. Tighten the locknut to lock the stem in position.
Note: The flow control valve (5) is factory adjusted to
2.5 GPM (9.5 L/min.). Do not change this setting.
FIGURE 42-6. PUMP CONTROLS

1. Pump Pressure Control
2. Test Switch
3. Pressure Gauge
4. Oil Level Plug

5. Flow Control Valve
OM4203

42-9
INJECTORS (SL-1 Series H))

Injector Specifications
Each lube injector services only one grease

point. In case of pump malfunction, each injector is equipped with a covered grease fitting to
allow the use of external lubricating equipment.
Injector output volume:

Maximum output = . . . . . . 0.08 in3 (1.31 cc).
Minimum output = . . . . . . 0.008 in3 (0.13 cc).
Operating Pressure:
Minimum - . . . . . . . . . 1850 psi (12 755 kPa)
Maximum - . . . . . . . . . 3500 psi (24 133 kPa)
Recommended - . . . . 2500 psi (17 238 kPa)
Maximum Vent Pressure - (Recharge)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 psi (4 137 kPa)
Injector Adjustment
The injectors may be adjusted to supply from 0.008 in3
to 0.08 in3 (0.13 cc to 1.31 cc) of lubricant per injection
cycle. The injector piston travel distance determines
the amount of lubricant supplied. This travel is in turn
controlled by an adjusting screw in the top of the injector housing.
Turn the adjusting screw (1, Figure 42-7) counterclockwise to increase lubricant amount delivered and clockwise to decrease the lubricant amount.
When the injector is not pressurized, maximum injector
delivery volume is attained by turning the adjusting
screw (1) fully counterclockwise until the indicating pin
(8) just touches the adjusting screw. At the maximum
delivery point, about 0.38 inch (9.7 mm) adjusting
screw threads should be showing. Decrease the delivered lubricant amount by turning the adjusting screw
clockwise to limit injector piston travel. If only half the
lubricant is needed, turn the adjusting screw to the
point where about 0.19 inch (4.8 mm) threads are
showing. The injector will be set at minimum delivery
point with about 0.009 inch (0.22 mm) thread showing.
NOTE: The above information concerns adjustment of
injector delivery volume. The timer adjustment should
also be changed, if overall lubricant delivery is too little
or too much. Injector output should NOT be adjusted to
less than one-fourth capacity.
FIGURE 42-7. TYPE SL-1 INJECTOR

1. Adjusting Screw
2. Locknut
3. Piston Stop Plug
4. Gasket
5. Washer
6. Viton O-Ring
7. Injector Body Assy.
8. Piston Assembly
9. Fitting Assembly
10. Plunger Spring
11. Spring Seat

12. Plunger
13. Viton Packing
14. Inlet Disc
15. Viton Packing
16. Washer
17. Gasket
18. Adapter Bolt
19. Adapter
20. Viton Packing
Note: The piston assembly (8) has a visible

indicator pin at the top of the assembly to verify
injector operation.

42-10
OM4203
SYSTEM CHECKOUT
To check system operation (not including timer), proceed as follows:
1. Turn keyswitch ON and start the engine.
2. Actuate the Lube System Test Switch at the reservoir/pump assembly.
3. The motor and pump should operate until the system attains 2500 psi (17 237 kPa).
4. Once the required pressure is achieved, the
pump motor should turn off and the system
should vent.
5. Check for pump, hose or injector damage or leakage with the system under pressure.
6. After checking system, shutdown engine, observing normal precautions regarding high voltage
present in the propulsion system before attempting to repair lube system.
Lubrication Cycle Timer Check

To check the solid state timer operation without waiting
for the normal timer setting, proceed as follows:
FIGURE 42-8. TIMER

(Shown with cover removed)
1. Timer Enclosure
2. Red LED (Light Emitting Diode)
3. Timer Selector
1. Remove timer dust cover.

NOTE: The timer incorporates a liquid and dust tight
cover which must be in place and secured at all times
during truck operation.
2. Adjust timer selector (3, Figure 42-8) to 5 minute
interval setting.
3. The timer should cycle in five minutes if the truck
is operating.
NOTE: If the timer check is being made on a cold start,
the first cycle will be approximately double the nominal
setting. All subsequent cycles should be within the
selected time tolerance.
4. Voltage checks at the timer should be accomplished if the above checks do not identify the
problem.
a. a. Insure timer ground connection is clean and
tight.
b. Using a Volt-Ohm meter, read the voltage
between positive and negative posts on the
solid state timer with the truck keyswitch ON.
Normal reading should be 18-26 VDC,
depending upon whether or not the engine is
running.
Lubrication Cycle Timer Adjustment

The timer is factory set for a nominal 2.5 minute (off
time) interval. Dwell time is approximately 1 minute, 15
seconds. A longer interval (off time) is obtained by turning the Selector knob (3, Figure 42-8) to the desired
position.
NOTE: Set timer by turning the Selector knob (3) to the
2.5 minute setting point. Then, turn the Selector
clockwise, one detent at a time, to the desired setting,
or until the maximum limit of eighty minutes is reached.
The timer is a sealed unit, do not attempt disassembly.
OM4203

42-11
SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

If the following procedures do not correct the problem, contact a factory authorized service center.
TROUBLE
Pump Does Not Operate
POSSIBLE CAUSES
SUGGESTED CORRECTIVE ACTION
Lube system not grounded.
Correct grounding connections to pump

assembly and truck chassis.
Electrical power loss.
Locate cause of power loss and repair. 24

VDC power required. Be sure keyswitch is
ON.
Timer malfunction.
Replace timer assembly
Solenoid valve malfunctioning.
Replace the solenoid valve assembly
Relay malfunctioning
Replace relay
Motor or pump malfunction.
Repair or replace motor and/or pump

assembly. (Refer to Service Manual for
rebuild instructions.)
NOTE: On initial startup of the lube system, the timing capacitor will not contain a
charge, therefore the first timing cycle will be about double in length compared to
the normal interval. Subsequent timer cycles should be as specified.
Pump Will Not Prime
Pump Will Not Build

Pressure
Low lubricant supply.
Dirt in reservoir, pump inlet clogged, filter

clogged.
Air trapped in lubricant supply line.
Prime system to remove trapped air.
Lubricant supply line leaking.
Check lines and connections to repair

leakage.
Vent valve leaking.
Clean or replace vent valve.
Pump worn or scored.
Repair or replace pump assembly. (Refer

to Service Manual for rebuild instructions.)
NOTE: Normally, during operation, the injector indicator stem will move into the
body of the injector when pressure builds properly. When the system vents (pressure release) the indicator stem will again move out into the adjusting yoke.
Injector Indicator Stem
Does Not Operate
Pressure Gauge Does Not

Register Pressure
Malfunctioning injector - usually

indicated by the pump building
pressure and then venting.
Replace individual injector assembly.
All injectors inoperative - pump

build up not sufficient to cycle injectors.
Service and/or replace pump assembly.

(Refer to Service Manual for rebuild
instructions.)
No system pressure to the pump

motor.
Check hydraulic hose from steering system.
No 24 VDC signal at pump solenoid.
Determine problem in 24 VDC electric

system.
Pressure reducing valve set too

low.
Refer to Pressure Control Valve Adjustment.
24V Relay (RB6, K6) may be defective.
Replace relay.

42-12
TROUBLE
Pump Pressure Builds

Very Slowly Or Not At All
24VDC Timer Not

Operating
Timer Stays Timed Out
Timer Turns On At
Intervals Two (2) To Ten
(10) Times More Often
Than Set Time Interval
Timer Turns On At
Intervals Faster Than
Allowable Tolerances Of
Settings
POSSIBLE CAUSES
OM4203
SUGGESTED CORRECTIVE ACTION
No signal at 24V relay.
Check Timer.
Pressure switch may be defective
Replace pressure switch.
Pressure reducing valve may be set

too low.
Refer to Pressure Control Valve Adjustment.
Grease viscosity may be too high

for temperature at which pump is
operating.
Replace grease with a lower viscosity

lubricant.
Pump inlet check or outlet check

may have foreign matter trapped
causing leakage.
Remove, inspect and clean, if necessary.Inspect sealing surfaces between

checks. Replace if rough or pitted.
Lubricant supply line leaks or is broken.
Repair lubricant supply line
Insufficient hydraulic oil supply.
Check oil pressure and flow to motor.
Timer BAT (-) connection is not on

grounded member.
Connect to good ground.
Timer IGN terminal connection not

on circuit continuously to circuit 71
during operation of vehicle.
Verify IGN terminal and circuit 71 connection.
Loose wire connections at any of

the timer terminals.
Secure wire connections.
Commutation failure in timer caused

by damaged component.
Replace Timer
Output relay contacts welded shut

caused by extended short to
ground.
Replace Timer.
Electrical noise is being introduced

into the power supply to the timer
overcoming suppressor capacitor
causing uncontrolled turn-on of its
output relay.
IMPORTANT: In some instances, electrical noise may be generated into

vehicle electrical system which may
cause timer to turn on at random intervals, independent of timer setting.
If this occurs, a 250 to 1,000 MFD
capacitor rated 150 to 350 VDC should
be added across BAT (+) and BAT (-)
terminals to suppress this noise and
improve timer performance.
Timer out of adjustment or damaged component.
Refer to Timer Adjustment and re-adjust

timer or replace timer.
OM4203

42-13
PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The following maintenance procedures should be used
to insure proper system operation.
Daily Lubrication System Inspection
1. Check grease reservoir level.
Inspect grease level height after each shift of
operation. Grease usage should be consistent
from day-to-day operations.
Lack of lubricant usage would indicate an inoperative system. Excessive usage would indicate
a broken supply line.
2. Check filter bypass indicator when filling reservoir. Replace element if bypassing.
3. Check all grease feed line hoses from the SL-1
Injectors to the lubrication points.
a. Repair or replace all damaged feed line hoses.
b. Make sure that all air is purged and all new
feed line hoses are filled with grease before
sending the truck back into service.
4. Inspect key lubrication points for a bead of lubricant around seal. If a lubrication point appears
dry, troubleshoot and repair problem.
250 Hour Inspection
1. Check all grease feed line hoses from the SL-1
Injectors to the lubrication points (see, Figure 422).
a. Repair or replace all worn / broken feed line
hoses.
4. Inspect all bearing points for a bead of lubricant

around the bearing seal.
It is good practice to manually lube each bearing
point at the grease fitting provided on each Injector. This will indicate if there are any frozen or
plugged bearings, and will help flush the bearings
of contaminants.
5. System Checkout
a. Remove all SL-1 injector cover caps to allow
visual inspection of the injector cycle indicator
pins during system operation.
b. Start truck engine.
c. Actuate the lube system manual test switch
(17, Figure 42-2). The hydraulic motor and
grease pump should operate.
d. With the grease under pressure, check each
SL-1 injector assembly.
The cycle indicator pin should be retracted
inside the injector body.
e. When the system attains 2500 psi (17 237
kPa), the pump should shut off and the pressure in the system should drop to zero, venting
back to the grease reservoir.
f. With the system vented, check all of the SL-1
injector indicator pins; all of the pins should be
visible. Replace or repair injectors, if defective.
g. Reinstall all injector cover caps.
h. Check timer operation.

feed line hoses are filled with grease before
Note: With engine running, lube system should activate

within 5 minutes. The system should build 2000 to
2500 psi within 25-40 seconds.
2. Check all grease supply line hoses from the pump

to the SL-1 injectors.
i. If the system is working properly, the machine

is ready for operation.
a. Repair or replace all worn / broken supply

lines.
j. If the system is malfunctioning, refer to the

troubleshooting chart.

supply line hoses are filled with grease before
3. Check grease reservoir level.
a. Fill reservoir if low. Check filter bypass indicator when filling reservoir. Replace element if
bypassing.
b. Check reservoir for contaminants. Clean, if
required.
c. Check that all filler plugs, covers and breather
vents on the reservoir are intact and free of
contaminants.
1000 Hour Inspection

1. Check pump housing oil level. Refill to bottom of
level plug with SAE 10W-30 motor oil if necessary

42-14
OM4203
NOTES:
OM5036 10/04
Specifications - Section 5
Page 50-1
TRUCK COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

The KOMATSU Model 830E Truck is an electric drive,
off-highway, rear dump truck whose gross vehicle
weight is 850,000 lbs. (385 553 kg) (240 - 255 ton nominal payload).
ENGINE
This Model 830E Truck is powered by a Komatsu
SDA16V160 diesel engine rated at 2500 hp (1865 kW)
@ 1900 RPM. The radiator, engine, alternator, and
blower are mounted on a separate subframe to provide
fast, easy removal and installation of the power module.
OPERATORS CAB
The Operators Cab has been engineered for operator
comfort and to allow for efficient and safe operation of
the truck. The cab contains an integrated ROPS and is
fully insulated to reduce noise and vibration. The tinted
safety-glass windshield and side windows provide
excellent visibility. The seat is a comfortable, adjustable suspension seat, the steering wheel provides tilt
and telescoping adjustments and controls are mounted
within easy reach of the operator. The instrument panel
provides the operator with instruments and gauges that
are necessary to control and monitor the trucks operating systems and is marked with international symbols
for easy identification of functions.
ALTERNATOR (G.E. GTA-26)

The alternator is mounted in-line with the engine. The
alternating current (AC) output of the alternator is rectified to direct current (DC) and sent to the wheel
mounted DC drive traction motors.
DYNAMIC RETARDING
The dual impeller, in-line blower supplies cooling air for

the alternator, rectifiers, and both traction motors. The
air is exhausted to atmosphere through the wheel
motors.
Dynamic retarding is used to slow the truck during normal operation or control speed coming down a grade.
The dynamic retarding ability of the DC electric system
is controlled by the operator by depressing the foot
operated retarder pedal and/or setting the RSC
(Retarder Speed Control) on the instrument panel.
Dynamic Retarding is automatically activated if truck
exceeds the overspeed setting.
WHEEL MOTORS
BRAKE SYSTEM
Traction motors located within each rear wheel structure receive electrical energy from the alternator. The
two traction motors convert electrical energy back to
mechanical energy through built-in gear trains within
the wheel structure. The direction of the drive motors is
controlled by a forward or reverse hand selector switch
located on a console in the cab to the right side of the
operator.
The braking system consists of an all hydraulic actuation system. Depressing the brake pedal actuates
wheel-speed single disc front brakes and armaturespeed dual disc rear brakes. The brakes can also be
activated by operating a switch on the instrument
panel. The brakes will be applied automatically if system pressure decreases below a preset minimum.
BLOWER
POWER STEERING
The Komatsu truck is equipped with a full time power
steering system which provides positive steering control with a minimum of effort by the operator. The system includes a nitrogen-charged accumulator which
automatically provides emergency power if the steering
hydraulic pressure is reduced below an established
minimum.
SUSPENSION
HYDRAIR II suspension cylinders located at each
wheel provide a smooth and comfortable ride for the
operator and dampens shock loads to the chassis during loading.
Page 50-2
10/04 OM5036
830E MAJOR COMPONENTS
OM5036 10/04
Page 50-3
SPECIFICATIONS
These specifications are for the standard Komatsu
830E Truck. Customer Options may change this listing.
ENGINE
Komatsu SDA16V160
(optional SSDA16V160)
No. of Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Operating Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-Stroke
Rated Brake HP. . . .2500 HP (1865 kW) @ 1900 RPM
Flywheel HP . . . . . .2360 HP (1761 kW) @ 1900 RPM
Weight* (Wet) . . . . . . . . . 21,182 pounds (9 608 kg)
* Weight does not include Radiator, Sub-frame, or
Alternator
ELECTRIC DRIVE SYSTEM - STATEX III

(AC/DC Current)
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Electric GTA - 26
Dual Impeller, In-Line Blower. . 9000 cfm (255 m3/min)
Motorized Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . General Electric 787
Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.875:1
Maximum Speed* . . . . . . . . . 30.3 MPH (48.8 km/h)
(*w/40.00-57 Tires and 31.875:1 gear train)
DYNAMIC RETARDING
Extended Range Retarding with fully blown 14-Resistor
grids and reverse retarding standard equipment.
Maximum Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4000 HP (2983 kW)
TIRES
Rock Service, Deep Tread. . . . . . . . . . (E-4) Tubeless
Standard Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.00 - 57, 68 Ply Rating
(w/787 Wheelmotor)
Separable Tire Rims *
5 Piece New Generation Rims *
Rims* are interchangeable with different positions on
the truck, but due to improved design for greater load
support, rims are not interchangeable with other manufacturers rims.
Rim Size:
29 in. (737 mm) X 57 in. (1448 mm) X 6 in. (152 mm)
24 VDC ELECTRIC SYSTEM

Batteries . . . . Four 12 Volt Batteries in Series/Parallel
. . . . . 220 Ampere-Hour Capacity w/Disconnect Switch
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Volt, 260 Ampere Output
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Volt
Cranking Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) 24 Volt
SERVICE CAPACITIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . U.S. Gallons
Crankcase * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74.0
* Includes Lube Oil Filters
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200
Hydraulic System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
. . . . . (Liters)
. . . . . . 280.0
. . . . . . . .568
. . . . . . .4542
. . . . . . . 946
Hydraulic Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 . . . . . . . .901

Wheel Motor Gear Box (each) . . . . . 10.5 . . . . . . . 39.7
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS*
Pumps
Hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tandem Gear Pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . .225 GPM (851 lpm.) @ 1900 RPM and
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2,500 psi (17 240 kPa)
Steering & Brake . . . . Piston, Pressure Compensating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 GPM (246 lpm) @ 1900 RPM and
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2,750 psi (18 961 kPa)
System Relief Pressures
Hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2,500 psi (17 240 kPa)
Steering/Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .4,000 psi (27 580 kPa)
Hoist Cylinders (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-Stage
Tank (Vertical/Cylindrical) . . . . . . . . . Non-Pressurized
Filtration . . . Remote-mounted, Replaceable, Elements
Suction. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Single, Full Flow, 100 Mesh
Hoist & Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full Flow, Dual In-Line,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Pressure Beta 12 Rating =200
*With Quick Disconnects for powering disabled truck
and system diagnostics.
STEERING (w / Accumulators)
Turning Circle - Front Wheel Track . . . . 93 ft. (28.4 m)
Full Time Power Steering. . . . . . . . . . . Twin Cylinders
Automatic Emergency Steering . . . . . . . . . Standard
Page 50-4
10/04 OM5036
SERVICE BRAKES
Actuation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Hydraulic
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Wheel Speed, Single Disc
Inboard Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Calipers
Disc Diameter, O.D. . . . . . . . . . 47.75 in. (1213 mm)
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armature Speed, Dual Disc
Disc Diameter, O.D. . . . . . . . . . 25.00 in. (635 mm)
Emergency Brake- . Automatically Applied (Standard)
Wheel Brake Lock. . . . . . . . Manual Switch on Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Loading and Dumping)
DISC PARKING BRAKE
Each Rear Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual Caliper
. . . . . . . . . . . . Spring Applied, Hydraulically Released
DUMP BODY CAPACITIES AND DIMENSIONS
WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION
Empty Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pounds. (Kilograms)
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,866. . . . (80 679)
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179,683. . . . (81 504)
Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357,549. . . (162 183)
Loaded Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . Pounds. (Kilograms)
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,870. . . (129 670)
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564,130. . . (255 887)
Total * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850,000. . . (385 557)
*Not To Exceed 850,000 lbs. (385 557 kg) including
options, liners, fuel and payload, and subject to
approval by Komatsu.
Standard, Heaped @ 2:1 (SAE) . . . .193 yd3 (147 m3)

Struck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 yd3 (117 m3)
Loading Height Empty . . . . . . . . . . 22 ft. 1 in. (6.71 m)
Dumping Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Non-heated Body w/Exhaust Mufflers . . . . . . Standard
OVERALL TRUCK DIMENSIONS

(Empty with Standard Body)
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Height with Canopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Height with Dump Body Up . . . . . . . . . .
Turning Circle (on front track) . . . . . . . .
46 ft. 5 in. (14.15 m)

24 ft. 0 in. (7.32 m)
22 ft. 7 in. (6.88 m)
44 ft. 0 in. (13.41 m)
93 ft. 0 in. (28.35 m)
OM6009 1/04
Payload Meter III - Section 60

Page 60-1
PAYLOAD METER III

INDEX
OPERATION SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Data Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Data Gathering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Suspension Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inclinometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Operator Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Speed Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Body-Up Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Brake Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Payload Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Communications Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Keyswitch Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Payload Meter Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Load Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Wiring and Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TCI Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
OPERATORS DISPLAY AND SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Reading the Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Reading the Load Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Using the Operator ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Using the Load and Ton Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Total Ton Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Total Load Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Clearing the Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Viewing Live Sensor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Other Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PAYLOAD OPERATION & CALCULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Description of Haul Cycle States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Haul Cycle Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Load Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Carry Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Measurement Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SOURCES FOR PAYLOAD ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Payload Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Loading Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Swingloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Speed and Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
HAUL CYCLE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Haul Cycle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Haul Cycle Warning Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
A: Continuous Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
B: Loading to Dumping Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
C: No Final Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
D: Maneuvering to Dumping Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
E: Average Load or Tare Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Page 60-2
OM6009 1/04
F: Final Zone to Dumping Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

H: False Body Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
I: Body Up Signal Failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
J: Speed Sensor Failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
K: New Tare Not Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
L: Incomplete Haul Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
M: Haul Cycle Too Long . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
N: Sensor Input Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Alarm Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Frame Torque Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sprung Weight Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Maximum Speed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PC SOFTWARE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PC Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Installing the PLMIII Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
DOWNLOADING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
PLMIII SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Starting Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Displayed Payload Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Time Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting to the Payload Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Configure the Payload Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Setting the Truck Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Setting the Gauge Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Setting the Frame Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Setting the Truck Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Setting the Komatsu Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Setting the Komatsu Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Clean Truck Tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Inclinometer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DATA ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Sorting on Truck Unit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Creating a Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Sorting on Truck Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Sorting on Date Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Sorting on Time Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Payload Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Creating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Summary - one page report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Detailed - multi-page report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Creating Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
CSV Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Compressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
To export data in ZIP format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Importing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Deleting Haul Cycle Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Viewing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Deleting Alarm Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
OM6009 1/04
OPERATION SECTION
Introduction
Payload Meter III (PLMIII) measures, displays and
records the weight of material being carried by an offhighway truck. The system generally consists of a
payload meter, a gauge display, deck-mounted lights,
and sensors. The primary sensors are four suspension pressures and an inclinometer. Other inputs
include a body up signal, brake lock signal, and
speed.
Data Summary
5208 haul cycles can be stored in memory. The following information is recorded for each haul cycle:
Payload
Operator ID number (0000-9999)
Distance traveled loaded and empty
The amount of time spent empty run/stop,
loading, loaded run/stop, and dumping
Maximum speed loaded and empty with time of
day
Average speed loaded and empty
Empty carry-back load
Haul-cycle, loading, dumping start time of day.
Peak positive and peak negative frame torque
with time of day
Peak sprung load with time of day
Tire ton-mph for each front and average per rear
tires
The payload meter stores lifetime data that cannot be
erased. This data includes:
Top 5 maximum payloads and time stamps.
Top 5 positive and negative frame torque and
time stamps
Top 5 maximum speeds and time stamps

Page 60-3
Data Gathering
Windows 95/98/NT software is available to download, store and view payload and fault information.
The PC software will download an entire truck fleet
into one Paradox database file. Users can query the
database by date, time, truck type and truck number
to produce reports, graphs and export the data. The
software can export the data in '.CSV' format that can
be easily imported into most spreadsheet applications. The Windows software is not compatible with
the Payload Meter 2 system.
It is important that each payload meter be configured
for each truck using the PC software. The information for frame serial number and truck number is
used by the database program to organize the payload data. In addition, the payload meter must be
configured to make calculations for the proper truck
model. Improper configuration can lead to data loss
and inaccurate payload calculations.

Page 60-4
OM6009 1/04
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
System Diagram
Suspension Pressure Sensors
Operator Display
PLMIII uses a two-wire pressure sensor. The range

for the pressure sensor is 4000 psi (281 kg/cm2)
and the overload limit is 10,000 psi (700 kg/cm2).
One wire to the sensor is the supply voltage and the
other is the signal. The 0-4000 psi range is converted into an electrical current between 4-20 ma.
The supply voltage for the sensor is nominally
+18vdc. Each pressure sensor has an 90" length of
cable that is terminated with #10 ring terminals. The
cable is specially shielded and reinforced to provide
mechanical strength and electronic noise immunity.
A typical part number for the pressure sensor is
PC0328.
The speedometer/display gauge is used as a

speedometer and payload display. The top display
is used for speed and can display metric (km/h) or
English (mph) units. Grounding terminal #4 on the
back of the speedometer will switch the meter to
display metric units. Leaving terminal #4 unconnected will cause the gauge to display English units.
The speedometer can be adjusted using a calibration potentiometer in the back just like existing
speedometers.
Inclinometer
The inclinometer is used to increase the accuracy of
load calculations on an incline. The inclinometer
uses three wires. For the sensor, red is the +18vdc
supply voltage, black is ground and the white is the
signal. The incline signal is a voltage between 1
and 4 volts. Zero degrees of incline is represented
by 2.6vdc on the signal line. The voltage signal will
be decreased by 0.103vdc for every degree of nose
up incline. A typical part number for the inclinometer assembly is 7861-92-5330.
The payload meter uses the lower display for payload information. The normal display mode shows
the current payload. The display can be changed to
show the load and total tons counter or the Operator
ID. Using the operator switch on the dash panel,
the current suspension pressures and incline can be
displayed. The units for display are set using the
PC software. Payloads can be displayed in Short
Tons, Long Tons or Metric Tons. A typical part number for this gauge is the PC0550.
OM6009 1/04

Page 60-5
Operator Switch
Payload Meter
The payload operator switch is used to set, view and

clear the Total Load Counter and Total Ton Counter.
It is also used to enter the Operator ID number (09999). This switch can also be used to view the suspension pressures and inclinometer. The payload
meter operator switch is located on the dashboard. It
is a two-way momentary switch. The top position is
the SELECT position. The SELECT position is used
step through the different displays. The lower position is the SET position. The SET position is used to
set the Operator ID or clear the load and total ton
counters. Normally the inputs from the switch to the
payload meter are open circuit. The switch momentarily connects the circuit to ground.
The payload meter is housed in a black aluminum

housing. There is a small window on the face of the
unit. Status and active alarm codes can be viewed
through the window. During normal operation, a twodigit display flashes 0 back and forth. Active fault
codes will be displayed for two seconds. These
codes are typically viewed using the laptop computer
connected to the serial communications port.
Speed Input
The circuit board inside the payload meter housing is

made from multi-layer, dual-sided surface-mount
electronics. There are no field serviceable components inside. The electronics are designed to withstand the harsh operating environment of the mining
industry. Opening the payload meter housing will
result in voiding the warranty.
PLMIII uses a speed signal to calculate speed, distance, and other performance data. This input is critical to the proper operation of the system. PLMIII
receives this signal from the speedometer/operator
display on the dashboard. The same signal displayed to the operator is used by the system. Distance calculations are made based on the rolling
radius of the tires for a particular truck.
Body-Up Switch
The Body-Up input signal is received from a magnetic switch located on the inside of the truck frame,
forward the pivot pin of the truck body. This is the
same switch typically used for input to the drive system. When the body is down, the switch closes and
completes the circuit to 71-Control Power. 24vdc
indicates the body is down. Open circuit indicates
that the body is up.
Brake Lock Switch

The brake lock is used to lock the rear brakes on the
truck. It is necessary for the accurate calculation of
swingloads during the loading process. Without the
brake lock applied, the payload meter will not calculate swingloads during the loading process. Without
the brake lock, the payload meter will assume that
the truck was loaded using a continuous loader and
flag the haul cycle record. All other functions will be
normal regardless of brake lock usage. The brake
lock input comes from the switch located on the dash
panel. The brake lock switch connects the circuit to
ground.
Open circuit indicates brake lock off.
Ground indicates brake lock on.
There is one 40-pin connector on the payload meter.

A jack-screw is used to hold the payload meter and
wire harness connector housings together. This
screw requires a 4mm or 5/32 hex wrench. The correct tightening torque for this screw is 25 lb-in. Four
bolts hold the payload meter housing to its mounting
bracket in the cab.
Communications Ports
The payload meter has two RS232 serial communications ports and two CAN ports. Connections for
the two serial ports are available inside the payload
meter junction box. The two CAN ports are available
for future electronics systems.
Serial port #1 is used to communicate with the dashboard display. It is also used to connect to the laptop
computer. The display gauge will remain blank when
the PC is using the serial port. This port initially operates with serial settings at 9600,8,N,1. These settings change automatically to increase the
communications rate when the PC is using the port.
This serial port uses a 3-wire hardware connection.
Serial port #2 is used to communicate to other onboard electronics like Modular Mining's Dispatch
system or the Scoreboard from Komatsu. This port
uses a 3-wire hardware connection. Connections to
this serial port need to be approved by Komatsu.
Several protocol options are available and detailed
technical information is available depending on
licensing.

Page 60-6
OM6009 1/04
Keyswitch Input
Load Lights
PLMIII monitors the status of the keyswitch. 24vdc

indicates that the keyswitch is on, open indicates the
keyswitch is OFF. The payload meter does not
receive its electrical power from the keyswitch circuit.
The payload meter will remain on for several seconds after keyswitch is removed. When the keyswitch power is removed, payload meter performs a
series of internal memory operations before turning
itself off. To allow for these operations, the keyswitch should be turned OFF for at least 15 seconds
before turning the keyswitch back on. The payload
meter will automatically reset itself without error if not
enough time is given for these operations. The display may blink briefly.
PLMIII uses load lights to indicate to the shovel operator the approximate weight of the material in the
truck. The load lights are illuminated only when the
brake lock is applied. The lights are controlled by the
payload meter through a series of relays in the junction box. The payload meter controls the relays with
24vdc outputs. A 24vdc signal from the payload
meter powers the relay coil and connects battery
power to the load light. When the relay is not powered by the payload meter, a pre-warm resistor connects the load light to a reduced voltage. This circuit
pre-warms the load light filaments and reduces the
inrush current when the light is fully illuminated. This
lengthens the operating life of the load lights.
Payload Meter Power
The load lights progressively indicate to the shovel

operator the approximate weight of the material in
the truck.
The payload meter receives its power from the battery circuit on the truck. Removing battery power
from the payload meter before removing keyswitch
and waiting 15 seconds may result in lost haul cycle
data. The payload meter turns itself off approximately
15 seconds after the keyswitch power is removed.
Some haul cycle data will be lost if battery power is
removed before waiting 15 seconds. The payload
meter system operates at a nominal voltage of 24vdc
at 1 to 2 amps depending on options. The payload
meter is designed to turn itself off if the supply voltage rises above 36vdc. The payload meter is also
protected by a 5 amp circuit breaker located in the
junction box.
Power to the load lights comes from the same battery
circuit. The load lights are powered through a relay.
The keyswitch circuit controls the relay. The load
lights are also protected by a 15 amp circuit breaker
in the junction box.
A flashing green light indicates the next swingload

will make the measured load greater than 50% of
rated load. A solid green light indicates that the current load is greater than 50% of rated capacity.
A flashing amber light indicates the next swingload
will make the measured load greater than 90% of
rated load. A solid amber light indicates that the current load is greater than 90% of rated capacity.
A flashing red light indicates the next swingload will
make the measured load greater than 105% of rated
load. A solid red light indicates that the current load
is greater than 105% of rated capacity.
The optimal loading target is a solid green and amber
lights with a flashing red light. This indicates that the
load is between 90% and 105% of rated load for the
truck and the next swingload will load the truck over
105%.
OM6009 1/04
Wiring and Termination
Most of the PLMIII truck connections use a heavyduty cable. This yellow multi-conductor cable uses a
16awg, finely stranded wire designed for continuous
motion operations. The conductors are protected by
a foil and braided shield for electronic noise immunity
and physical strength. A typical part number for this
wire is LW086-63. This wire is typically terminated
with a #10 ring terminal, part number VH2584. Most
connections for the PLMIII system are made in the
payload meter junction box.
TCI Outputs
The GE drive system on the 930E requires information from the payload meter regarding the loaded
condition of the truck. There are three outputs from
the payload meter to GE to indicate the relative load
in the truck. 24 vdc on the 73MSL circuit indicates
that the load is 70% of rated load. 24 vdc on the
73FSL circuit indicates the truck is 100% loaded.
The 73OSL circuit is not currently used.

Page 60-7

Page 60-8
OM6009 1/04
OPERATORS DISPLAY AND SWITCH
Using the Operator ID
Reading the Speedometer
The current Operator ID number is recorded with

each haul cycle. The number can be between 0 and
9999.
The top window of the speedometer/display gauge is

the speedometer section. The display shows the
speed indicated by the frequency being received by
the gauge. This can be adjusted using the potentiometer on the back of the gauge. In addition, the
units for the display can be changed. Terminal #4
controls the displayed units. If #4 is grounded, the
display will be metric. If terminal #4 is left open, the
display will be in English units.
To set the Operator ID:

1. Press the SELECT switch until Id = is displayed.
2. Hold the SET button until 0000 is displayed.
The first digit should be flashing.
3. Press the SET button again to change the digit.
4. Press the SELECT button once to adjust the
second digit.
Reading the Load Display
5. Use the SET button again to change the digit.
The lower display on the speedometer/display gauge

is used for payload information. The SELECT position on the operator switch allows the user to scroll
through a number of useful displays. The order for
the displays is as follows:
7. Use the SET button again to change the digit.

third digit.
fourth digit.
9. Use the SET button again to change the digit
PL= Payload
Id = Operator ID
tL =Total Shift Tons
LC= Shift Load Counter
LF= Left Front Suspension Pressure
rF= Right Front Suspension Pressure
Lr= Left Rear Suspension Pressure
rr= Right Rear Suspension Pressure
In = Inclinometer
The display holds the displayed information until the

SELECT switch is pressed again. The suspension
pressures, inclinometer, and payload displays are
based on current sensor inputs.
Communications to the display use the same serial
link as the download connection. Whenever another
computer is connected to serial port #1 to download
or configure the system, the lower display will blank.
This is not the same connection used by mine dispatch systems.
10. Press the SELECT button one more time to

enter the ID.
If no buttons are pressed for 30 seconds, the display
will return to normal operation. The number being
entered will be lost and the ID number returns to the
previous ID number.
Using the Load and Ton Counter

PLMIII allows the truck operator to monitor and track
the total tons hauled and the number of haul cycles
during the shift. This display can be cleared at the
beginning of each shift to allow the operator to record
how many loads and tons have been hauled during
the shift.
Total Ton Counter
The Total Ton Counter records the number of tons
hauled since the last time it was cleared. This display is in 100s of tons. For example, if the display
432
shows
the total tons is 43,200. This display
can be cleared at the beginning of each shift to allow
the operator to record how many tons have been
hauled during the shift. The units are selected using
the PC software.
To view the Total Ton Counter press and release
the SELECT switch until
the gauge.
tL = is displayed on
OM6009 1/04

Page 60-9
Total Load Counter

The Total Load Counter records the number of loads
hauled since the last time it was cleared. This display can be cleared at the beginning of each shift to
allow the operator to record how many loads have
been hauled during the shift.
To view the Total Load Counter press and release
the SELECT switch until
the gauge.
LC= is displayed on
The inclinometer displays whole degrees of incline.

Positive incline is truck nose up. The gauge will
quickly display the type of information shown every
10 seconds. For example, if the left-front pressure is
being displayed,
Lf=
every minute. Only the payload display,

does not display this information.
Clearing the Total Ton Counter or Total Load Counter

clears both records.
To clear the total ton and total load counter:
1. Press the SELECT switch until
tL=or
LC= is displayed.
2. Hold the SET button until the display clears.
PL=
Left Front Pressure - To display the pressure in

the left-front suspension, press and release the
SELECT switch until
Clearing the Counters
will flash on the display
Lf= is displayed.
Right Front Pressure - To display the pressure in

the right-front suspension, press and release the
SELECT switch until
rf= is displayed.
Left Rear Pressure - To display the pressure in

the left-rear suspension, press and release the
SELECT switch until
Lr= is displayed.
Right Rear Pressure - To display the pressure in

the right-rear suspension, press and release the
SELECT switch until
rr= is displayed.
Inclinometer - To display the truck incline, press

Viewing Live Sensor Data
The display can also be used to quickly show the current readings from the four suspension pressure sensors and the inclinometer. This can be used during
regularly scheduled service periods to check the
state of the suspensions. These displays are live
and will update as the values change.
The live displays cannot be cleared and the SET button will have no effect.
The units for the display are controlled by the configuration of the payload meter. If the payload meter is
set to display metric units, the pressures will be displayed in tenths of kg/cm2. For example, if the display shows
202 the actual value is 20.2 kg/
cm2. If the payload meter is set to display short tons,

the pressures will be displayed in psi (lbs/in2). To
convert from kg/cm2 to psi, multiply by 14.2. 1kg/
cm2 = 14.2 psi. There is no way to detect the units
setting for the gauge without the PC software.
and release the SELECT switch until

displayed.
In= is
Other Display Messages

On startup of the payload meter system, the gauge
display will scroll the truck type that the PLMIII is configured for. For example, on a 930E, the gauge will
scroll,
----930E---.
If the PLMIII encounters memory problems, it will dis-
Er88
play
where 88 is the specific memory
error. In this very rare circumstance, the system
should be turned off for 30 seconds and restarted.

Page 60-10
PAYLOAD OPERATION & CALCULATION

Description of Haul Cycle States
The typical haul cycle can be broken down into eight
distinct stages or states. Each state requires the payload meter to make different calculations and store
different data.
States or stages of a typical haul cycle
1. Tare Zone
2. Empty
3. Loading
4. Maneuvering
5. Final Zone
6. Hauling
7. Dumping
8. After Dump
Haul Cycle Description
A new haul cycle is started after the load has been
dumped from the previous cycle. The payload meter
will stay in the after_dump state for 10 seconds to
confirm that the load has actually been dumped. If
the current payload is less than 20% of rated load,
the payload meter will switch to the tare_zone and
begin calculating a new empty tare. If, after dumping, the payload has not dropped below 20% of rated
load the meter will return to the maneuvering or hauling states. In this case, the false_body_up flag will
be recorded in the haul cycle record.
While in the tare_zone state, and moving faster than
5 km/h (3 mph), the payload meter calculates the
empty sprung weight of the truck. This tare value will
be subtracted from the loaded sprung weight to calculate the final payload. The payload meter will
switch from the tare_zone or empty to the loading
state if swingloads are detected. By raising the
dump body while in the empty state the payload
meter can be manually switched back to the
tare_zone to calculate a new tare.
From the empty state, the payload meter will switch
to the loading state through one of two means. If the
brake lock is applied, the payload meter will be analyzing the suspension pressures to detect a swingload. If a swingload is detected, the meter will switch
to the loading state. The minimum size for swingload
detection is 10% of rated load. Swingload detection
usually takes 4-6 seconds. The second method to
switch from empty to loading is through continuous
loading. This can happen if the brake lock is not
used during loading. If the load increases above
50% of rated load for 10 seconds without the brake
OM6009 1/04
lock applied, the meter will switch to loading and
record the continuous_loading flag in the haul cycle.
The payload meter switches from loading to maneuvering as soon as the truck begins moving. The
maneuvering zone is 160m and is designed to allow
the operator to reposition the truck under the shovel.
More payload can be added anytime within the
maneuvering zone. Once the truck travels 160m (0.1
miles) the payload meter switches to the final_zone
and begins calculating payload. If the body is raised
while the payload meter is in the maneuvering state,
the no_final_load flag will be recorded in the haul
cycle record, no payload will be calculated, and the
meter will switch to the dumping state.
While in the final_zone moving faster than 5 km/h (3
mph), the payload meter calculates the loaded
sprung weight of the truck. The same advanced
algorithm is used to calculate the empty and loaded
sprung weights. The payload meter will switch from
the final_zone to the dumping state if the Body-Up
signal is received. If the truck has moved for less
than 1 minute in the final_zone, the payload meter
will calculate the final payload using an averaging
technique which may be less accurate. If this happens, the average_load flag will be recorded in the
haul cycle.
The payload meter switches to the dumping state
when the dump body rises. The payload meter will
switch from dumping to after_dump when the dump
body comes back down.
From the after_dump, the payload meter will switch
to one of three states:
1. If the average payload is greater than 20% of
rated load and no final payload has been calculated, the payload meter will return to the
maneuvering state. After the truck travels
160m (0.1 mile) the meter will switch to the
final_zone and attempt to calculate the payload
again. The false_body_up flag will be recorded
in the haul cycle record.
2. If the average payload is greater than 20% of
rated load and the final payload has been calculated, the payload meter will switch back to the
hauling state. The false_body_up flag will be
recorded in the haul cycle record.
3. If the average payload is less than 20% of rated
load, the payload meter will switch to the
tare_zone and begin to calculate a new empty
tare.
OM6009 1/04
Load Calculation
The final load calculation is different from the last
swingload calculation. The accuracy of the swing
load calculation depends on loading conditions and
the position of the truck during loading. The last
swingload calculation is not the value recorded in
memory as the final load. The final load is determined by a series of calculations made while the
truck is traveling to the dump site.
Carry Back
Carry back is calculated as the difference between
the current truck tare and the clean truck tare. The
clean truck tare is calculated using the PC software.
When the suspensions are serviced or changes are
made that may affect the sprung weight of the truck,
a new clean truck tare should be calculated.
Measurement Accuracy
Payload measurements are typically repeatable
within 1%. Accuracy for a particular scale test
depends on specific combinations of pressure sensors and payload meters as well as the specifics of
each scale test. Comparisons from different scale
tests are often made without considering the differences introduced by the specific installation and
operation of the scales for each test. In addition,
each pressure sensor and payload meter introduces
it's own non-linearity. Each truck becomes an individual combination of sensors and payload meter.
Errors from these sources can introduce up to a 7%
bias in the payload meter calculations for a specific
scale test, for an individual truck.
Because the PLMIII calculates a new empty tare for
each payload, a detailed scale test must weigh the
trucks empty and loaded for each haul cycle. Using
a simple average of 2 or 3 empty truck weights as an
empty tare for the entire scale test will introduce significant error when comparing scale weights to
PLMIII weights.

Page 60-11
SOURCES FOR PAYLOAD ERROR

Payload Error
The number one source of error in payload calculation is improperly serviced suspensions. The payload meter calculates payload by measuring
differences in the sprung weight of the truck when it
is empty and when it is loaded. The sprung weight is
the weight of the truck supported by the suspensions.
The only method for determining sprung weight is by
measuring the pressure of the nitrogen gas in the
suspensions. If the suspensions are not properly
maintained, the payload meter cannot determine an
accurate value for payload. The two critical factors
are proper oil height and proper nitrogen charge.
If the suspensions are overcharged, the payload
meter will not be able to determine the empty sprung
weight of the truck. The suspension cylinder must be
able to travel up and down as the truck drives empty.
The pressure in an overcharged suspension can
push the suspension rod to full extension. In this
case, the pressure inside the cylinder does not accurately represent the force necessary to support that
portion of the truck.
If the suspensions are undercharged, the payload
meter will not be able to determine the loaded sprung
weight of the truck. The suspension cylinder must be
able to travel up and down as the truck drives loaded.
If the pressure in an undercharged suspension cannot support the load, the suspension will collapse
and make metal-to-metal contact. In this case, the
pressure inside the cylinder does not accurately represent the force necessary to support that portion of
the truck.
Low oil height can also introduce errors by not correctly supporting a loaded truck. This is why the correct oil height and nitrogen charge are the most
critical factors in the measurement of payload. If the
suspensions are not properly maintained, accurate
payload measurement is not possible. In addition,
suspension maintenance is very important to the life
of the truck.

Page 60-12
OM6009 1/04
Loading Conditions
HAUL CYCLE DATA
The final load calculation of the PLMIII system is not

sensitive to loading conditions. The final load is calculated as the truck travels away from the shovel.
Variations in road conditions and slope are compensated for in the complex calculations performed by
the payload meter.
PLMIII records and stores data in its on-board flash

memory. This memory does not require a separate
battery. The data is available through the download
software.
Pressure Sensors
PLMIII can store 512 alarm records in memory.

When the memory is full, the payload meter will
erase the oldest 312 alarm records and continue
recording.
Small variations in sensors can also contribute to

payload calculation error. Every pressure sensor is
slightly different. The accuracy differences of individual sensors along the range from 0 to 4000 psi can
add or subtract from payload measurements. This is
also true of the sensor input circuitry within individual
payload meters. These differences can stack up 7%
in extreme cases. These errors will be consistent
and repeatable for specific combinations of payload
meters and sensors on a particular truck.
Swingloads
Swingload calculations can be affected by conditions
at the loading site. Parking the truck against the
berm or large debris can cause the payload meter to
inaccurately calculate individual swingloads. While
the PLMIII system uses an advanced calculation
algorithms to determine swingloads, loading site conditions can affect the accuracy.
Speed and Distance

The payload meter receives the same speed signal
as the speedometer. This signal is a frequency that
represents the speed of the truck. The payload
meter uses this frequency to calculate speeds and
distances. The meter assumes a single value for the
rolling radius of the tire. The rolling radius may
change at difference speeds by growing larger at
higher speeds. The actual rolling radius of the tire
will also change between a loaded and empty truck.
The payload meter does not compensate for these
changes.
PLMIII can store 5208 payload records. When the

memory is full, the payload meter will erase the oldest 745 payload records and continue recording.
All data is calculated and stored in metric units within

the payload meter. The data is downloaded and
stored in metric units within the Paradox database on
the PC. The analysis program converts units for displays, graphs and reports.
The units noted in Table 1 are the actual units stored
in the data file. The value for the haul cycle start time
is the number of seconds since January 1, 1970 to
the start of the haul cycle. All other event times are
referenced in seconds since the haul cycle start time.
The PC download and analysis program converts
these numbers into dates and times for graphs and
reports.
OM6009 1/04

Page 60-13
Haul Cycle Data

The following information is recorded for each haul cycle:
Table 1. Haul Cycle Data
Data
Unit
Remark
Truck #
alphanumeric
Up to 22 characters can be stored in this field to identify the truck. Typically this field will be just the
truck number.
Haul Cycle Start Date/Time
seconds
Number of seconds from 1/1/70 to the start of the haul cycle, haul cycle starts when the meter transitions from dumping to empty state after the previous haul cycle, download program converts seconds
into date and time for display
Payload
tons
Stored as metric, download program allows for conversion to short or long tons.
Number of Swingloads
number
The number of swingloads detected by the payload meter
Operator ID
number
This is a 4 digit number that can be entered by the operator at the start of the shift.
Warning Flags
alpha
Each letter represents a particular warning message about the haul cycle, details are located on page
19.
Carry-back load
tons
The difference between the latest empty tare and the clean truck tare
Empty haul time
seconds
Number of seconds in the tare_zone and empty states with the truck moving
Empty stop time
seconds
Number of seconds in the tare_zone and empty states with the truck stopped
Loading time
seconds
Number of seconds in the loading state
Loaded haul time
seconds
Number of seconds in the maneuvering, final_zone and loaded states with the truck moving
Loaded stop time
seconds
Number of seconds in the maneuvering, final_zone and loaded states with the truck stopped
Dumping time
seconds
Number of seconds in the dumping state
Loading start time
seconds
Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to when the meter transitions from empty to loading
state
Dump start time
seconds
Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the time when the meter switches from loaded to
dumping state
Loaded haul distance
Distance traveled while loaded
Empty haul distance
Distance traveled while empty
Loaded max speed
km/h
Maximum speed recorded while the truck is loaded
Loaded max speed time
seconds
Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the time when the max speed occurred
Empty max speed
km/h
Maximum speed recorded while the truck is empty
Empty max speed time
seconds
Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the time when the max speed occurred
Peak positive frame torque
ton-meter
Positive frame torque is measured as the frame twists in the clockwise direction as viewed from the
operators seat.
Peak frame torque time
seconds
Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the peak torque, download program converts to
time for display
Peak negative frame torque
ton-meter
Negative frame torque is measured as the frame twists in the counter-clockwise direction as viewed
from the operator's seat.
Peak frame torque time
seconds
Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the peak torque, download program converts to
time for display
Peak sprung load
tons
Peak dynamic load calculation
Peak sprung load time
seconds
Number of seconds from the start of the haul cycle to the peak instantaneous load calculation
Front-left tire-ton-km/h
t-km/h
Tire ton-km/h for haul cycle
Front-right tire-ton-km/h
t-km/h
Average rear tire-ton-km/h
t-km/h
Truck Frame Serial Number
alpha
The truck serial number from the nameplate on the truck frame
Reserved 1-10
number
These values are internal calculations used in the continued development of the PLMIII system and
should be ignored

Page 60-14
OM6009 1/04
Haul Cycle Warning Flags
F: Final Zone to Dumping Transition
The payload meter expects haul cycles to progress in

a particular way. When something unexpected takes
place, the system records a warning flag. Several
events within the haul cycle can cause a warning flag
to be generated. Each one indicates an unusual
occurrence during the haul cycle. They do not necessarily indicate a problem with the payload meter or
payload calculation.
This message is generated when the payload meter

senses a Body-Up while it is calculating the final payload indicating that the operator has dumped the
load. It may also be generated if the Body-Up signal
is not properly reaching the payload meter and the
weight in the truck falls dramatically while the truck is
calculating the final payload.
A: Continuous Loading
This message is generated when the truck is loaded
over 50% full without the payload meter sensing
swingloads. This indicates that a continuous loading
operation was used to load the truck. It may also
indicate that the payload meter did not receive the
Brake Lock input while the truck was being loaded.
There may be a problem with the wiring or the Brake
Lock was not used. The payload meter will not measure swingloads unless the Brake Lock is used during the loading process.
B: Loading to Dumping Transition
H: False Body Up
This message indicates that the body was raised during the haul cycle without the load being dumped.
The Body-Up signal indicated that the truck was
dumping, but the weight of the truck did not fall below
20% of the rated load.
I: Body Up Signal Failed
This message indicates that the load was dumped
without a Body-Up signal being received by the payload meter. The weight of the truck fell below 20%,
but the payload meter did not receive a Body-Up signal from the sensor.

senses a body up input during the loading process.
This message is usually accompanied by a
no_final_load flag.
J: Speed Sensor Failed
C: No Final Load
K: New Tare Not Calculated

is unable to determine the final payload in the truck.
Typically, this means that the payload meter switched
from a loaded state to the dumping state before the
load could be accurately measured.
The payload meter was not able to accurately calculate a new empty sprung weight for the truck to use
as the tare value for the haul cycle. The tare value
from the last haul cycle was used to calculate payload.
D: Maneuvering to Dumping Transition
L: Incomplete Haul Cycle

senses a Body-Up input during the maneuvering or
repositioning process indicating that the operator has
dumped the load. It may also be generated if the
Body-Up signal is not properly reaching the payload
meter and the weight in the truck falls dramatically
while the truck is maneuvering or repositioning.
The payload meter did not have proper data to start

the haul cycle with after powering up. When the
PLMIII powers off, it records the data from the haul
cycle in progress into memory. This flag indicates
that this data was not recorded the last time the payload meter was shut down. This can happen when
the main battery disconnect is used to shut the truck
down instead of the keyswitch. A haul cycle with this
warning flag should not be considered accurate. Haul
cycles with this warning are displayed in red on the
Payload Summary window and are not included in
the summary statistics for reports or display.
E: Average Load or Tare Used

This message indicates that the recorded payload
may not be as accurate as a typical final load calculation. Typically, this is recorded when loading begins
before an accurate tare is calculated or the load is
dumped before the load can be accurately measured.
This message indicates that the payload meter

sensed the truck loading and dumping without
receiving a speed signal.
OM6009 1/04

Page 60-15
M: Haul Cycle Too Long
Alarm Records
The haul_cycle_too_long flag indicates that the haul

cycle took longer than 18.2 hours to complete. The
times stored for particular events may not be accurate. This does not affect the payload calculation.
The payload meter stores alarm records to give service personnel a working history of the system. All
codes are viewed using the PC connected to the
payload meter. Active codes are also displayed on
the two-digit display on the meter itself. Each code
has a specific cause and should lead to an investigation for correction. Some failures can be overcome by the payload meter. Haul cycle data will
indicate if an alarm condition was present during the
cycle. Failures with the suspension or inclinometer
sensors cannot be overcome.
N: Sensor Input Error

An alarm was set for one of the 5 critical sensor
inputs during the haul cycle. The five critical sensors are the four pressure sensors and the inclinometer. Without these inputs, the payload meter
cannot calculate payload. A haul cycle with this
warning flag should not be considered accurate.
Haul cycles with this warning are displayed in red on
the Payload Summary window and are not included
in the summary statistics for reports or display.
Table 2. Fault Code Data

Fault
Name
Code
Description
Left front pressure high
Input current > 22 ma
Left front pressure low
Input current < 2 ma
Right front pressure high
Right front pressure low
Left rear pressure high
Left rear pressure low
Right rear pressure high
Right rear pressure low
Inclinometer high
Input voltage < 0.565 vdc
10
Inclinometer low
Input voltage > 5.08 vdc
13
Body-up input failure
Payload meter detected dumping activity without receiving a body up signal
16
Memory write failure
Indicates possible memory problem at power start up. Cycle power and recheck.
17
Memory read failure
Indicates possible memory problem at power start up. Cycle power and recheck.
24
System key-on status
Payload Meter failed to correctly start at power up. Cycle power and recheck.
26
User switch fault - SELECT
Select switch on for more than 2 minutes, may indicate short to ground
27
User switch fault - SET
Set switch on for more than 2 minutes, may indicate short to ground
Frame Torque Data

Payload meter records the top 5 peak positive and
negative frame torque values and the time they
occurred. The frame torque is a measure of the
twisting action along the centerline of the truck. Positive frame torque is measured when the suspension
forces on the front of the truck act to twist the frame
in the clockwise direction as viewed from the operator's seat. Negative frame torque is measured when
the forces from the suspensions act in the opposite
direction.
For example, if the left front and right rear pressure

rises as the right front and left rear pressure drops,
the truck frame experiences a twisting motion along
the longitudinal centerline. In this case, the payload
meter will record a positive frame torque.
The 5 highest values in the positive and negative
direction are stored in permanent memory within the
payload meter.

Page 60-16
OM6009 1/04
Sprung Weight Data
System Configuration
The payload meter is constantly monitoring the live

payload calculation. This value naturally rises and
falls for a loaded truck depending on road and driving
conditions. The payload meter records the top 5
highest payload calculations and the time they
occurred. This information is stored in permanent
memory inside the meter.
PLMIII needs to be configured for operation when it

is first installed on the truck. This process requires
several steps and uses the laptop computer to make
the necessary settings. The setup procedure can be
broken down into several steps:
Connecting the laptop to the PLMIII system.
Maximum Speed Data

The payload meter records the top 5 highest speeds
and the time they occurred. This information is
stored in permanent memory inside the meter.
Starting communications
Setting the time & date
Setting the truck type
Setting the truck ID
Setting the speedometer/display gauge units
Installing the PLMIII Software
PC SOFTWARE OVERVIEW
PC Overview
The PC software has several basic functions:
Configure the PLMIII system on the truck.
Troubleshoot and check the PLMIII system.
Download data from the PLMIII system.
Analyze data from the payload systems.
Configuration, troubleshooting and downloading
require a serial connection to the payload meter on
the truck. Analysis can be done at any time without a
connection to the payload meter.
Payload data is downloaded from several trucks into
one database on the PC. The database can be queried to look at the entire fleet, one truck or truck
model. The data can be graphed, reported, imported
or exported. The export feature can take payload
data and save it in a format that spreadsheet programs like Excel or word processing programs can
easily import.
The CD ROM containing the Payload Data Management (PDM) Software will automatically begin installation when it is inserted into the drive on the PC. If
this does not happen, the software can be installed
by running the Setup.exe program on the CD ROM.
The minimum PC requirements for running the software is a Pentium 133Mhz with 64 MB of ram and at
least 300 MB of free hard drive space available. For
improved performance, the recommended PC would
be a Celeron, AMD K6-2 or better processor with 128
MB of ram running at 400 Mhz. The PDM Software
uses a powerful database to manipulate the large
amounts of data gathered from the PLMIII system.
Using a more powerful computer and added memory
to run the software can result in a significant improvement in performance. The software is written to use
a minimum 800x600 screen resolution.
OM6009 1/04
DOWNLOADING DATA
PLMIII records many types of data. The PLMIII PC
software is designed to download the data from a
whole truck fleet. Instead of creating one data file for
each truck, the PC software combines all the data
from many trucks into one database on the hard
drive of the computer. The software then allows
users to query the database to create custom reports
and graphs. Data for individual trucks or groups of
trucks can be easily analyzed. This same data can
be exported for use in other software applications like
word processors and spreadsheet applications.
As the database grows, performance of the PC software for analysis will slow down. It may be helpful to
periodically export data. For example, query the
database to show the oldest quarter, month, or half
year and print out a summary report. Then export
the data to a compressed format and save the file in
a secure location. Once the data is exported, delete
the entire query results from the database. If necessary, the data can easily be imported back into the
main database for analysis at a future date. Removing this older data will improve performance.
The PC software downloads the data from the payload meter into a single Paradox database. The data
from all the trucks is added to the same database.
Downloading the payload meter can take several
minutes. The data is added to the database on the
laptop used to download.
To move the data to another computer, a query must
be run to isolate the particular data for export. Do not
press the operator switch on the dashboard while
downloading

Page 60-17
To download the payload meter:
1. Connect to the payload meter and start the PC
software.
2. From the main menu, select CONNECT TO
PAYLOAD METER. The PC will request the latest status information from the payload meter.
The number of haul cycles and alarms will be
displayed.
3. Select the BEGIN DOWNLOAD button. The
PC will request the payload and alarm data from
the payload meter and save it into the database.
This may take several minutes. A progress bar
at the bottom will show the approximate time
left.

Page 60-18
PLMIII SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Starting Communications
The PDM software allows users to download and
configure the system.
OM6009 1/04
Short Tons: Payload is displayed in short tons, distances and speeds will be displayed in Miles
Metric Tons: Payload is displayed in metric tons,
distances and speeds are displayed in Kilometers
Long Tons: Payload is displayed in long tons, distances and speeds are displayed in Miles
Time Units
Minutes and Seconds Example:
Five minutes and thirty-two seconds = 5:32
Decimal Minutes Example:
Five minutes and thirty-two seconds = 5.53
Connection Menu
Before connecting to the payload meter, select

CHANGE PROGRAM OPTIONS and confirm that
the program has selected the correct laptop serial
port. Most laptops use Comm 1 for serial communications. The units displayed for reports and graphs
by the PC software can be set on this form. Click
DONE to return to the main menu.
From the main menu, click the CONNECT TO PAYLOAD METER button. The PC will try to connect to
the payload meter and request basic information
from the system. In the event of communications
trouble, the PC will try 3 times to connect before timing-out. This may take several seconds.
Displayed Payload Units
Three options are available for the display of units in

the PC software, reports, and graphs:
The connection screen displays basic system information to the user.

Frame S/N should agree with the truck serial
number from the serial plate located on the truck
frame.
Truck Number is an ID number assigned to the
truck by the mine.
The Payload Meter Date / Time values come
from the payload meter at the moment of
connection.
Number of Haul Cycle Records is the number of
haul cycles records stored in memory and
available for download.
Number of Active Alarms shows how many
alarms are currently active in the system at the
time of connection. If there are active alarms,
the DISPLAY ACTIVE ALARMS button is
available.
Number of Inactive Alarms shows how many
alarms have been recorded in memory and are
available for download.
PLM Software Version displays the current
version of software in the payload meter.
The information on the connection menu comes from
the configuration of the payload meter system on the
truck.
OM6009 1/04
There are also many configuration and download
options available from this screen. The Connection
Menu is updated only when the connection is first
made. It does not update automatically. To view
changes made while connected, the user must close
the window and reconnect to the payload meter.
The connection menu is displayed after a serial connection has been established and the PC software
has connected to the payload meter.

Page 60-19
Setting the Date and Time
The time shown on the form is the time transmitted

from the payload when the connection was first
established.
Connecting to the Payload Meter

Communications to the PLMIII requires a laptop
computer running the PDM software. The software
connects to the payload meter through the meter's
serial port #1. This is the same port used by the
speedometer/display gauge. When the laptop is
using the serial port, the lower display on the operator gauge on the dashboard will be blank. This does
not affect the operation of the speedometer.
Connect the laptop to the system using the
EF9160 communications harness. The download
connector is typically located on the housing
mounted in the cab to the back wall. The PLMIII
system uses the same connection as the
Payload Meter 2 system.
Configure the Payload Meter
Configuration of the payload meter requires a serial
connection to the PLMIII system. Clicking the CONFIGURE PAYLOAD METER button will bring up the
Truck Configuration screen and menu. This screen
displays the latest configuration information stored
on the payload meter.
When changes are made to the configuration, the
SAVE CHANGES button must be pressed to save
the changes into the payload meter. To confirm the
changes, exit to the main menu and re-connect to the
payload meter.
The date and time are maintained by a special chip

on the PLMIII circuit board. The memory for this chip
is maintained by a very large capacitor when the
power is removed from the payload meter. This will
maintain the date and time settings for approximately
30 days. After this time, it is possible for the payload
meter to lose the date and time setting. It is recommended that the system be powered every 20 days
to maintain the date and time. If the date and time is
lost, simply reset the information using this procedure. It takes approximately 90 minutes to recharge
the capacitor.
Changing the date and time will affect the haul cycle
in progress and may produce unexpected results in
the statistical information for that one haul cycle.
To change the time:
1. Click on the digit that needs to be changed.
2. Use the up/down arrows to change or type in
the correct value.
3. Press the SAVE CHANGES button to save the
new time in the payload meter.
To change the date:
1. Click on the digit that needs to be changed.
2. Type in the correct value or use the pull-down
calendar to select a date.
3. Press the SAVE CHANGES button to save the
new time in the payload meter.

Page 60-20
Setting the Truck Type
1. From the Truck Configuration screen, use the

pull-down menu to select the truck type that the
payload meter is installed on.
2. Press the SAVE CHANGES button to program
the change into the meter.
Setting the Gauge Display Units

The Payload Meter Speedometer / Display Gauge
displays the speed on the upper display. The units
for the speed display are selected using a jumper on
the rear of the case.
The payload units on the lower display can be
changed from metric to short tons or long tons using
the Truck Configuration screen. This selection also
switches between metric (kg/cm2) and psi (lbs/in2) for
the live display of pressure on the gauge.
1. From the Truck Configuration screen, select the
payload units to be used on the lower display of
the speedometer/display gauge.
the change into the payload meter.
Setting the Frame Serial Number
OM6009 1/04
Setting the Truck Number
Most mining operations assign a number to each
piece of equipment for quick identification. This number or name can be entered in the Truck Number
field. It is very important to enter a unique truck number for each truck using the PLMIII system. This
number is one of the key fields used within the haul
cycle database. The field will hold 20 alpha-numeric
characters.
1. On the Truck Configuration screen, enter the
truck number in the appropriate field.
Setting the Komatsu Distributor

This field in the haul cycle record can hold the name
of the Komatsu distributor that helped install the system. Komatsu also assigns a distributor number to
each distributor. This number is used on all warranty
claims. This Komatsu distributor number can also be
put into this field. The field will hold 20 alphanumeric characters.
distributor name or number in the appropriate
field.
Setting the Komatsu Customer
The frame serial number is located on the plate

mounted to the truck frame. The plate is outboard on
the lower right rail facing the right front tire. It is very
important to enter the correct frame serial number.
This number is one of the key fields used within the
haul cycle database. The field will hold 20 alphanumeric characters.
truck frame serial number in the appropriate
field.
This field in the haul cycle record can hold the name
of the mine or operation where the truck is in service.
Komatsu also assigns a customer number to each
customer. This number is used on all warranty
claims. This Komatsu customer number can also be
put into this field. The field will hold 20 alphanumeric characters.
customer name or number in the appropriate
field.
OM6009 1/04
Clean Truck Tare
The payload meter uses the clean truck tare value to

calculate carry-back load for each haul cycle. The
carry-back stored in the haul cycle record is the new
empty tare minus the clean truck tare.
This procedure should be performed after service to
the suspensions or when significant changes are
made to the sprung weight of the truck. Before performing this procedure, be sure the suspensions are
properly filled with oil and charged. It is critical to
payload measurement that the proper oil height and
gas pressure be used.
Once the clean tare process is started, the payload
meter will begin to calculate the clean empty sprung
weight of the truck. This calculation continues while
the truck drives to the next loading site. Once the
procedure is started, there is no reason to continue
to monitor the process with the PC. The truck does
not need to be moving to start this procedure.
1. After cleaning debris from the truck and checking to see that the suspensions are properly
serviced, use the PLMIII software to connect to
the payload meter.
2. From the Truck Configuration screen, select
CLEAN TRUCK TARE.
3. Be sure to follow the screen instructions.

Page 60-21
Inclinometer Calibration
The inclinometer calibration procedure is designed to

compensate for variations in the mounting attitude of
the inclinometer. The inclinometer input is critical to
the payload calculation.
This procedure should be performed on relatively flat
ground. Often the maintenance area is an ideal location for this procedure.
1. After cleaning debris from the truck and checking to see that the suspensions are properly
serviced, use the PLMIII software to connect to
the payload meter.
2. From the Truck Configuration screen, select
INCLINOMETER.
3. With the truck stopped and the brake lock on,
press the START button. This instructs the payload meter to sample the inclinometer once.
4. Turn the truck around. Drive the truck around
and park in the exact same spot as before, facing the other direction.
5. With the truck stopped and the brake lock on,
press the START button. This instructs the payload meter to sample the inclinometer again.
The payload meter will average the two samples to determine the average offset.
6. Be sure to follow the screen instructions.

Page 60-22
OM6009 1/04
DATA ANALYSIS
Sorting on Truck Unit Number
The data analysis tools allow the user to monitor the

performance of the payload systems across the
fleet. Analysis begins when the VIEW PAYLOAD
DATA button is pressed. This starts an "all trucks,
all dates, all times" query of the database and displays the results in the Payload Summary Form.
The truck unit number is the truck unit number

entered into the payload meter when it was configured at installation. The query can be set to look for
all trucks or one particular truck number. When the
program begins, it searches through the database
for all the unique truck numbers and creates a list to
select from.
The user can change the query by changing the

dates, times, or trucks to include in the query for display.
Haul cycles in the data grid box at the bottom can
be double-clicked to display the detailed results of
that haul.
Choosing one particular truck number will limit the

data in the displays, summaries and reports to the
one selected truck. To create reports for truck number 374, select 374 from the pull-down menu and hit
the QUERY DATABASE AND DISPLAY button.
Payload Summary Form
Creating a Query
Sorting on Truck Type
The program defaults to show all trucks, all types,

all dates and all times for the initial query. The display can be narrowed by selecting which trucks or
types to view and for what dates and times.
The truck type is the size of the truck from the family
of Komatsu trucks. This allows the user to quickly
view results from different types of trucks on the
property. For example, a separate report can be
generated for 830E and 930E trucks.
The query items are added in the "AND" condition.

If the user selects a truck # and date range, the
query will sort the data for that truck number AND
the date range.
OM6009 1/04
Sorting on Date Range

Page 60-23
2. Change the From date to July 1, 2000.
The default query starts in 1995 and runs through the

current date on the PC. To narrow the range to a
specific date, change the From and To dates.
For example, to view the haul cycle reports from
truck 374 for the month of July, 2000:
1. Select truck 374 from the Truck Unit pull-down
menu.
3. Change the To date to July 31, 2000.

4. Change the From time to 06:00.
5. Change the To time to 18:00.
6. Press the QUERY DATABASE AND DISPLAY

to view the results.
2. Change the From date to July 1, 2000.
This query will display haul cycles from January 5 to

January 8, from 6:00 AM to 6:00 PM.
Date
Time
Jan 5, 2000
Jan 6, 2000
Jan 7, 2000
Jan 8, 2000
Jan 9, 2000
0:00
6:00
3. Change the To date to July 31, 2000.

4. Press QUERY DATABASE AND DISPLAY to
view the results.
12:00
18:00
Sorting on Time Range

The time range sorts the times of the day for valid
dates. Changing the time range to 6:00AM to
6:00PM will limit the payloads displayed to the loads
that occurred between those times for each day of
the date range. Times are entered in 24:00 format.
To view the haul cycle reports from the first shift for
truck 374 from January 5, 2000 to January 8, 2000:
1. Select truck 374 from the Truck Unit pull-down
menu.
24:00
Query : Date: 1/5/00 to 1/8/00
Daily Shift Time: 6:00 to 18:00
Haul Cycles Included in the Query
The shift times selected can extend the query past

the original date. If the dates set for the query are
January 5 to January 8 and the times were changed
to query the 6:00 PM (18:00) to 6:00 AM (06:00) shift,
the results would extend into the morning of the 9th.
This can been seen in the following example:

Page 60-24
OM6009 1/04
Creating Reports
Date
Time
Jan 5, 2000
Jan 6, 2000
Jan 7, 2000
Jan 8, 2000
Jan 9, 2000
0:00
6:00
Reports can be generated and viewed on the screen

or printed. These reports are generated from the
query displayed on the Payload Summary Screen.
From the example in the "Sorting on Time Range"
section, the report printed would only contain data
from truck 374 during the month of July 2000, from
8:00 AM to 5:00 PM.
It is important to carefully select the query data and
press the QUERY DATABASE AND DISPLAY button
before printing a report.
12:00
18:00
24:00
Query : Date: 1/5/00 to 1/8/00
Daily Shift Time: 18:00 to 6:00
Haul Cycles Included in the Query
Payload Detail Screen

The Payload Detail screen gives the details for any
individual haul cycle. From the Payload Summary
screen, double-click on any haul cycle to display the
detail.
OM6009 1/04
NOTE: Some haul cycles may contain the Sensor

Input warning flag. This indicates that one of the
four pressure sensors or inclinometer was not
functioning properly during the haul cycle. Haul
cycles with this warning are displayed in red on the
Payload Summary window and are not included in
the summary statistics for reports or display.
Summary - one page report

A summary of the queried data can be printed onto
1 page. The cycle data is summarized onto one
sheet. Displayed is the speeds, cycle times, load
statistics, frame and tire data.
Detailed - multi-page report

The detail report starts with the summary report and
follows with pages of data for each haul cycle. The
detailed report prints date, time, payload, cycle
times, and cycle distances, speeds and the number
of swing loads.

Page 60-25

Page 60-26
Creating Graphs
OM6009 1/04
Exporting Data
The PLMIII software can generate graphs that

quickly summarize payload data. These graphs can
be customized for printing. Just like the reports, the
graphs are generated from the query displayed on
the Payload Summary screen. From the "Sorting on
Time Range" example, the graph that is printed
would only contain data from truck 374 during the
month of July 2000, from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM.
It is important to carefully select the query data and
press the QUERY DATABASE AND DISPLAY button
before creating a graph.
1. From the Payload Summary Screen select the
GRAPH button at the bottom. The Histogram
Setup screen will display.
The data from the database can be exported for use

with other software applications.
The data is
selected from the currently displayed query. The
exported data can be put into a .CSV file or a compressed .zip file.
The .CSV format allows data to be easily
imported into spreadsheet applications and word
processing applications.
The .Zip format allows data to be transferred from
one computer to the PDM Software database on
another computer. This offers a compact way to
transfer data from one computer to another.
CSV Export
2. Enter the Lowest Value. This will be the lowest

payload on the graph. Any payloads less than
this value will be summed in the first bar.
3. Enter the Highest Value. This will be the highest value on the graph. Payloads over this
value will be summed in the last bar.
4. Enter the Incremental Change. This will determine the number of bars and the distance
between them. The program limits the number
of bars to 20. This allows graphs to fit on the
screen and print onto 1 page.
5. Press the CREATE GRAPH button.
The graph will be displayed based on the query settings from the Payload Summary screen. The graph
can be customized and printed.
CSV stands for Comma Separated Value. This is an

ASCII text file format that allows spreadsheet applications like Excel and Lotus 123 to import data easily. To export the data into a .csv file, press the
EXPORT button at the bottom of the payload sumary
screen and select TO CSV. The program will request
a filename and location for the file.
OM6009 1/04

Page 60-27
Reserved 1-5, 7-10: These values are internal

calculations used in the continued development
of PLMIII and should be ignored.
Reserved 6: This value is the payload estimate
at the shovel just before the truck begins to
move.
Two sets of data are exported. At the top of the file

will be the haul cycle data. The columns, left to right
are:
Truck number
Haul cycle start date
Haul cycle start time
Payload
Swingloads
Operator ID
Warning Flags
Carry Back
Total Haul Cycle time
Empty Running Time
Empty stop time
Loading time
Loaded running time
Loaded stopped time
Dumping time
Loading start time
Dumping start time
Loaded haul distance
Empty haul distance
Loaded maximum speed
Time when loaded maximum speed occurred
Empty maximum speed
Time when loaded maximum speed occurred
Maximum + frame torque
Time when the maximum + frame torque
occurred
Maximum - frame torque
Time when the maximum - frame torque occurred
Maximum sprung weight calculation
Time when the maximum sprung weight
calculation occurred
Left Front Tire-kilometer-hour
Right Front Tire-kilometer-hour
Average Rear Tire-kilometer-hour
Frame serial number
The second series of data below the haul cycle data

is the alarms. The alarm columns, left to right are:
The alarm type

The date the alarm was set
The time the alarm was set
Alarm description
The date the alarm was cleared
The time the alarm was cleared
Compressed
This export function allows the data from one laptop

to be transferred to another computer. This can be
useful when a service laptop is used to download
multiple machines and transfer the data to a central
computer for analysis. This can also be used to copy
haul data from a particular truck onto a diskette for
analysis.
The file format is a compressed binary form of the
displayed query. The file can only be imported by
another computer running the PDM Software.

Page 60-28
To export data in ZIP format:
1. Confirm that the data displayed is the query
data that needs to be exported.
2. From the payload summary screen, press the
EXPORT button and select TO ZIP.
3. The program will ask for a filename and location.
Importing Data
This import function allows the data from one laptop
to be transferred to another computer. This can be
useful when a service laptop is used to download
multiple machines and transfer the data to a central
computer for analysis. This can also be used to copy
haul data from a particular truck from a diskette into a
database for analysis.
To import data, press the IMPORT button at the bottom of the Payload Summary screen. The program
will ask for a .zip file to import, locate the file and
press OPEN. The program will only import .zip files
created by another computer running the PDM Software.
OM6009 1/04
Deleting Haul Cycle Records
To delete haul cycle records from the main database,
press the DELETE button at the bottom of the Payload Summary screen. The program will display a
summary of the records from the displayed query. To
delete a record, select one at a time and press the
DELETE button. It is recommended that records be
exported to a zip file for archival purposes before
deletion. Multiple records may be selected by holding down the Shift key. Pressing the DELETE ALL
button will select all the records from the current
query and delete them.
NOTE: There is no recovery for records that have
been deleted from the main database. It is highly
recommended that all records be exported and
archived in a compressed file format for future
reference before being deleted.
OM6009 1/04
Viewing Alarms
From the Payload Summary screen, click the
ALARMS button to display the alarm screen. The
alarms are sorted by the query settings from the Payload Summary screen. Alarms can be displayed as
Active or Inactive.

Page 60-29
Deleting Alarm Records
To delete alarm records from the main database,
press the DELETE button at the bottom of the Alarm
Display screen. The program will display a summary
of the alarms from the query. To delete an alarm,
select one at a time and press the DELETE button. It
is recommended that the query data be exported to a
.zip file for archival purposes before deletion.
Multiple records may be selected by holding down
the Shift key. Pressing the DELETE ALL button will
select all the alarms from the current query and
delete them.
NOTE: There is no recovery for alarms that have
been deleted from the main database. It is highly
recommended that all records be exported and
archived in a compressed file format for future
reference before being deleted.

Page 60-30
OM6009 1/04
NOTES
PORTIONS OF THIS PRODUCT RELATING TO PAYLOAD MEASURING SYSTEMS ARE

MANUFACTURED UNDER LICENSE F ROM
L.G. HAGENBUCH holder of
U.S. Patent Numbers 4,831,539 and 4,839,835
OM7004
Cab Radio - Section 70

Page 70-1
RADIO, AM / FM STEREO CASSETTE
FIGURE 70-1. CAB RADIO
SETTING THE TIME
GENERAL RECEIVER FUNCTIONS
1. Turn the key switch ON.

2. Press and hold DSPL/TM SET (9, Figure 70-1)
for 2 seconds. When the number display
flashes, time set mode is active.
3. Press TUNE / SEEK
hour setting.
(7 & 8) to change the
The receiver is equipped with two FM radio bands,

FM1 and FM2. The two bands are identical, however,
each one allows the operator to set 6 preset
channels for a total of 12 FM presets overall.
Turning The Power On And Off
1. Turn the key switch to ON.
4. Press the DSPL/TM button to switch to minutes. The minute digits will flash when in this
mode.
5. Press TUNE / SEEK to change the minute
setting.
After 5 seconds of inactivity has elapsed, the display
will return to the default mode. The clock will now
display the correct time of day.
2. Press PWR (1, Figure 70-1) to turn the receiver

on and off. Pushing ON/AUDIO (6) may also be
used to turn the receiver power on.
Display
With the receiver off, the clock will be displayed.
Momentarily pressing DSP/TM SET (9) with the
receiver on will allow the operator to toggle between
displays.
When the receiver is in AM, FM1, FM2, or WX,

the display will toggle between the frequency and
the clock.
When the receiver is in an active satellite mode
and the provider is transmitting the available
information, the display will toggle between the
clock, frequency, station name, artist, song title
and music type.

Page 70-2
When the receiver is in the cassette mode, the

display will toggle between TP SIDE 1 or TP
SIDE 2, and the clock.
Setting The Default Display

1. Press and hold DSPL/TM (9) for 2 seconds
until the hour digits flash.
2. Press push-button 6/FF (15) to change the
default display.
After 5 seconds of inactivity has elapsed, the
selected default will display.
Adjusting Display Brightness
1. Press and hold DIM (14) until DIM appears on
the display.
2. Rotate ON/AUDIO knob (6) clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired brightness is
obtained.
OPERATING THE RADIO

BAND
Press BAND (2, Figure 70-1) to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, and WX Weather (US) and Satellite (XM1,
XM2 or SR1, SR2). If a separate satellite receiver is
not connected to your radio and operational, the satellite bands will not appear in the display.
TUNE/SEEK
TUNE (7) / SEEK (8) allows you to move up or
down in frequency to other stations. There are two
modes of operation for finding other stations, manual
tuning and seek mode.
Press and hold both TUNE (8) and BAND (2) for 2
seconds to toggle between the two modes. The display will read either MANUAL or SEEK to indicate the
mode the receiver is in.
Manual Tuning
Press
TUNE (8) to tune to the next higher fre-
quency. Press SEEK (7) to tune to the next lower

frequency. Holding either of the buttons for more
than 0.5 seconds will activate fast tuning for
increased speed.
OM7004
When in satellite mode, press and release either the
TUNE or the SEEK buttons to navigate to the
next channel. Pressing and holding either of the two
buttons for more than 0.5 seconds will increase the
cycle speed through the channels. The increase
cycle speed is approximately 10 channels per second.
SEEK Mode
Hold either the TUNE or SEEK buttons for more
than 0.5 seconds to enter the seek mode. SEEK will
appear on the display when this mode is activated. In
this mode, the radio will scroll through stations and
stop on the next station with a strong signal.
NOTE: If the receiver can not find a strong enough
signal after two band cycles, the seek mode will
discontinue and the receiver will return to the initial
starting point.
When in satellite mode, press TUNE or SEEK to
navigate through the channels. Pressing and holding
either of the two buttons for more than two seconds
will increase the cycle speed through the channels.
The increase cycle speed is approximately 10 channels per second.
SCAN
Press SCAN button (10) to scan all stations on the
current band. When a strong frequency is found, the
receiver will pause on that station for about 5 seconds and then continue scanning. Scan will appear
on the display along with the frequency when this
mode is active. To stop scanning, press the SCAN
button again.
AUTO
AUTO (12) allows the receiver to store the 6 strongest stations onto push-buttons 1 through 6. Press
AUTO until AUTO and AS appear on the display. The
presets on the current band only will now be programmed with the 6 strongest frequencies. Presets
on the other inactive bands will not be changed.
Pressing AUTO again will delete the stations and
default to the original preset stations.
NOTE: The AUTO function is not functional on the
satellite band.
OM7004
ADJUSTING THE RECEIVER SETTINGS

VOLUME: Rotate ON/AUDIO (6, Figure 70-1) knob
clockwise to increase the volume and counter-clockwise to decrease the volume. VOL will be displayed
along with the volume level.
BASS: Push and release ON/AUDIO (6) knob until
BASS and the current bass level is displayed. Rotate
the knob clockwise to increase the bass and counterclockwise to decrease the bass.
TREBLE: Push and release ON/AUDIO (6) knob
until TREB and the current treble level is displayed.
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the treble and
counter-clockwise to decrease the treble.
FADE: Push and release ON/AUDIO (6) knob until
FADE and the current level is displayed. Rotate the
knob clockwise to move the sound to the front speakers and counter-clockwise to move the sound to the
rear speakers.
BALANCE: Push and release ON/AUDIO (6) knob
until BAL and the present level is displayed. Rotate
the knob clockwise to move the sound to the right
speakers and counter-clockwise to move the sound
to the left speakers.
SPEAKER: Push and release ON/AUDIO (6) knob
until SPKR and the current setting is displayed.
Rotate the ON/AUDIO knob to select 2-speaker or 4speaker operation. When 2-speaker operation active,
the rear speakers are muted and the FADE option
will not appear on the menu.
PROGRAMMING PRESET STATIONS

Presets are stations that are stored on each of the 6
push-buttons. After a station has been programmed
into one of the preset buttons, pushing the preset
provides a quick return to that station. The six buttons can each store a preset channel per band.
Perform the following steps for programming presets:
1. Turn the receiver ON.
2. Select the band and the desired station.
3. Press and hold one of the six push-buttons for
at least 2 seconds. During the 2 second period,
receiver output will be muted and the push-button number will not show on the display. When
the station has been committed to memory, the
audio and the preset icon will return.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the remaining
available presets.

Page 70-3
OPERATION OF THE WEATHERBAND

(U.S.)
NOAA - Weather Radio is a service of the National
Weather Service. It provides continuous broadcasts
of the latest weather information directly from the
National Weather Service offices. Taped weather
messages are repeated every four to six minutes and
are routinely revised every one to three hours, or
more frequently if needed. Most of the stations operate 24 hours, daily.
The weather for the area you are in may be found on
one of 7 stations. When in the Weatherband mode,
the display will show the WX icon and CHAN # to
indicate the channel. The channel may be adjusted
through the TUNE /SEEK buttons, and may be
preset as in the radio mode.
The frequency associated with each channel is as
follows:
1. 162.550 MHz
2. 162.400 MHz
3. 162.475 MHz
4. 162.425 MHz
5. 162.450 MHz
6. 162.500 MHz
7. 162.525 MHz
The National Weather Service operates approximately 372 stations. Close to 90 percent of the
nation's population is within the listening range of a
NOAA Weather Radio broadcast.

Page 70-4
OM7004
SATELLITE RADIO
In order to use the satellite radio function on your
radio, a subscription must be ordered from a provider. There are two providers in the U.S. currently,
XM and Sirius Satellite Radio. When a subscription is
ordered, an additional receiver and antenna will need
to be obtained from your provider.
To activate the external satellite receiver, you must
supply the provider with your Electronic Serial Number (ESN). To find the ESN, first install the satellite
receiver per instructions from the your provider. Next,
follow the instructions below.
XM Satellite Radio:
1. Turn both the radio and the satellite receiver on.
Press the BAND button on the radio and select
either XM1 or XM2.
2. Tune your satellite receiver to channel 0 to see
the ESN display.
Record the ESN.
The display will return to the default setting after
5 seconds.
Sirius Satellite Radio:
1. Turn the radio on and with the display showing
the clock, press and hold the DSPL/TM SET
button until the hours segment is flashing.
2. Press the BAND button and the ESN will be displayed.
Record the ESN.
The display will return to the default setting after
5 seconds.
NOTE: Only one satellite receiver can be installed

and connected to your receiver at one time.
NOTE: Obstructions in the satellite signal may impair
your satellite radio reception. Contact your provider
for satellite radio reception problems.
Operating Satellite Radio

1. Use the BAND button to select the proper satellite radio band. (XM1, XM2, SR1, SR2)
2. Use the TUNE and SEEK
gate through the channels.
buttons to navi-
Program Type Search (PTY)

XM and Sirius both allow you to search by music
type. Program Type Search (PTY) allows you to perform a music search by type. Perform the following
steps in order to do a PTY search.
1. Press SCAN and push-button 1 at the same
time. PTY will appear on the display.
2. Continue to press push-button 1 until the
desired genre of programming is displayed.
3. Once the desired genre has been selected,
press the TUNE and SEEK buttons to scroll
through the different channels in that genre.
Station names will appear on the display as
your scroll.
You may also scan through the channels using
the scan feature. Press the SCAN button to
begin scanning the channels. Press the SCAN
button again to stop at the desired channel.
OM7004

Page 70-5
CASSETTE PLAYER
Cassette Functions
The cassette player that the radio is equipped with

works best with cassettes that range from 30 to 90
minutes long. Cassettes that are longer than 90 minutes have thinner tape, and do not work well in this
model cassette player.
It is also important to only use cassettes that are in
good condition. Cassettes that are dirty, damaged, or
have been exposed to excessive heat and/or sunlight
could cause damage to the cassette player and possible failure.
The cassette player is equipped with automatic
equalization and metal tape sensing functions. An M
will appear on the display when a metal tape is
sensed.
Cleaning the cassette player is a recommended
maintenance item. It should be performed at 35 hour
(cassette play) intervals. Failure to clean the cassette
player may diminish sound quality and cause cassette player failure.
4/REV (17): This button rewinds the cassette. The

cassette will continue to rewind until the button is
pressed again, or until the cassette reaches the end
of the tape. <REW will appear on the display as the
cassette is rewinding.
Playing A Cassette
6/FF (15): This button fast forwards the cassette. The

cassette will continue to fast forward until the button
is pressed again, or until the cassette reaches the
end of the tape. FWD> will appear on the display as
the cassette is fast forwarding.
Eject (5): Press this button to eject the cassette
from the player. When the eject button is held, it acts
as a stop button.
(4): This button causes the cassette player to
reverse directions and play the opposite side of the
cassette. Pressing the button a second time will
reverse the cassette back to the original side.
NOTE: The cassette will automatically flip to the
opposite side when the end of the tape is reached.
1. Turn the receiver ON.

2. Insert a cassette into the player. The cassette
icon will appear on the display. The tape will
begin to play when the icon appears.
Press
button (3, Figure 70-1) to change
from the radio to a cassette. TP SIDE 1 or TP
SIDE 2 will appear on the display depending on
which side of the cassette is currently being
played. If a cassette is not loaded in the player,
NO TAPE will appear on the display.
NOTE:A tape may be inserted when the receiver is
off by pressing the eject button and inserting the tape
within 25 seconds.
PROGRAMMABLE EJECT DEFAULT

The cassette player has been pre-programmed to
return to the radio after a tape has been ejected. This
default may be changed to an eject audio mute
mode. This mode will mute the radio after a cassette
has been ejected. When this occurs, NO TAPE will
appear on the display and the radio will remain
muted until BAND (2) is pressed. Pressing this button
will enable the radio.
Perform the following steps to change the eject
default mode:
1. Press and hold DSP/TM SET (9, Figure 70-1)
for at least 2 seconds until the hour digits flash.
2. Press
button (3) to toggle between
P.PLAY and EJMUTE. After 5 seconds of
inactivity, the receiver will return to the default
display.

Page 70-6
OM7004
Bad Tape Detect
CASSETTE PLAYER CLEANING
If the receiver detects a bad cassette, BAD TAPE

will appear on the display, and the tape will be
ejected. If this occurs, the cassette should be
removed from the player and should not be reinserted.
After 35 hours of cassette play, the display will read

TP CLEAN for 5 seconds. This indicates that it is
time to clean the cassette player.
If it is desired to use a cleaning tape or a CD adapter

in the cassette player, the bad tape detector must be
turned OFF. Perform the following steps in order to
disable this mode:
2. Disable BAD TAPE DETECT mode. Press and
1. Turn the receiver off and turn the key switch to

OFF.
2. Press and hold
button (3) for 5 seconds.
BAD TAPE DETECT OFF will appear on the
display. When this is displayed, the detector
has been disabled.
Repeat this procedure to reactivate the bad
tape detector. BAD TAPE DETECT ON will
appear on the display after the detector has
been activated.
1. Turn the key switch to ON, and turn the receiver

off.
hold
button (3, Figure 70-1) for 5 seconds.
BAD TAPE DETECT OFF will appear on the
display. When this is displayed, the detector
has been disabled.
3. Turn the receiver on.
4. Insert a wet-type, non-abrasive, scrubbing cassette cleaner. Follow the instructions provided
with the cleaner.
5. Reset the clean tape timer. With the receiver
on, press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds. TP CLEAN will appear on the display and
the tape icon will flash after 3 seconds has
elapsed. After 5 seconds CLN RST will appear
on the display. When this occurs, the clean tape
timer will be reset to zero hours. If the button
was released before CLN RST was displayed,
the timer will not be reset.
NOTES:
www.komatsuamerica.com
Komatsu America Corp.

2300 N.E. Adams Street Peoria, IL 61639 Phone: 309-672-7577 Fax: 309-672-7072
Copyright 2004 Komatsu

Printed in U.S.A.

Om 830e Serie A30733 Up Cead015001 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Om 830e Serie A30733 Up Cead015001 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Om 830e Serie A30733 Up Cead015001 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation & Maintenance

Diesel engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle

EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY

KOMATSU IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

GARANTIE SUR LE CONTRLE DES MISSIONS

KOMATSU NEST PAS RESPONSABLE DES INCIDENTS OU DOMMAGES CONSQUENTS.

CEHQ000700 - Komatsu America International Company 12/99

INFORMATION IMPORTANTE SUR LE MOTEUR

IMPORTANT ENGINE INFORMATION

CHARGE DE SORTIE ADV.

ADV. LOAD OUTPUT

EX. FUEL RATE

RGLAGE DE LALLUMAGE INJECTION INITIALE

RPM FAMILY EMISSION LIMIT

ENGINE DATAPLATE - ENGLISH / FRENCH

This ALERT symbol is used with the signal words,

DANGER identifies a specific potential hazard WHICH WILL

WARNING identifies a specific potential hazard WHICH MAY

CAUTION is used for general reminders of proper safety

Alerts Page - a description of DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Safety Is Thinking Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When Starting The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREPARING FOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1

SUDDEN LOSS OF ENGINE POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-9

OPERATOR CAB AND CONTROLS

STEERING WHEEL AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2

Service Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Defroster Vent Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-22

830E SERVICE CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-1

MAJOR COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

PAYLOAD METER III

RADIO, AM / FM STEREO CASSETTE

SETTING THE TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-1

PROGRAMMING PRESET STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-3

KOMATSU 830E TRUCK

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Standard Charts and Tables - Section 12

STANDARD CHARTS AND TABLES

EFFECT OF SPECIAL LUBRICANTS

Table 1: -STANDARD TORQUE CHART

1 ft. lbs. = 0.138 kg.m = 1.356 N.m

Standard Charts and Tables - Section 12

Standard Assembly Torques For 12-Point, Grade 9,

Standard Metric Assembly Torque For Class 10.9

The following specifications apply to required assembly

The following specifications apply to required assembly

Capscrew threads and seats SHALL be lubricated

Capscrew threads and seats SHALL NOT be

Unless instructions specifically recommend otherwise,

NOTE: If zinc-plated hardware is used, each piece

* Shank Diameter (in.) - Threads per inch

* Shank Diameter (mm) - Threads per millimeter

Suggested* Sources for Rust Preventive Grease:

Standard Charts and Tables - Section 12

Standard Charts and Tables - Section 12

TABLE VIII. TORQUE CONVERSIONS

See NOTE on page 12-5 regarding table usage